Naphthyridine derivative compounds

ABSTRACT

The invention relates to new naphthyridine derivative compounds, to pharmaceutical compositions comprising said compounds, to processes for the preparation of said compounds and to the use of said compounds in the treatment of diseases, e.g. cancer.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No.14/855,986, filed with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office on Sep. 16,2015, which is a divisional of U.S. application Ser. No. 14/354,793,filed with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office on Apr. 28, 2014, whichis a national stage filing under Section 371 of InternationalApplication No. PCT/GB2012/052669 filed on Oct. 26, 2012, and publishedin English as WO 2013/061077 A1 on May 2, 2013, and claims priority toBritish Application No. 1118675.6 filed on Oct. 28, 2011 and to U.S.Provisional Application No. 61/552,883 filed on Oct. 28, 2011. Theentire disclosures of each of the prior applications are herebyincorporated herein by reference.

FIELD OF THE INVENTION

The invention relates to new naphthyridine derivative compounds, topharmaceutical compositions comprising said compounds, to processes forthe preparation of said compounds and to the use of said compounds inthe treatment of diseases, e.g. cancer.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

According to a first aspect of the invention there is provided compoundsof formula (I):

including any tautomeric or stereochemically isomeric form thereof,whereinX¹ is N and X² is CR^(3a), or X² is N and X¹ is CR^(3a);each R² is independently selected from hydroxyl, halogen, cyano,C₁₋₄alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl, C₂₋₄alkynyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl,hydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy, haloC₁₋₄alkyl, haloC₁₋₄alkoxy, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkyl,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxy, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, haloC₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl,C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl wherein each C₁₋₄alkyl may optionally be substitutedwith one or two hydroxyl groups, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, R¹³,C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R¹³,C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with R¹³, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with —C(═O)—R¹³,—C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —NR⁷R⁸, C₁₋₄alkyl substitutedwith —C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with —NR⁷R⁸, C₁₋₄alkoxysubstituted with —C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸, —NR⁷R⁸ and —C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸; or when two R²groups are attached to adjacent carbon atoms they may be taken togetherto form a radical of formula:—O—(C(R¹⁷)₂)_(p)—O—;—X—CH═CH—; or—X—CH═N—;wherein R¹⁷ represents hydrogen or fluorine, p represents 1 or 2 and Xrepresents O or S;Y represents —CR¹⁸═N—OR¹⁹ or -E-D;D represents a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclylor a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclylcontaining at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein saidcarbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by oneor more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups;E represents a bond, —(CR²²R²³)_(n)—, C₂₋₄alkenediyl optionallysubstituted with R²², C₂₋₄alkynediyl optionally substituted with R²²,—CO—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—, —(CR²²R²³)_(s)—CO—, —NR²²—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—,—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—NR²²—, —O—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—, —(CR²²R²³)_(s)—O—,—S(O)_(m)—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—, —(CR²²R²³)_(s)—S(O)_(m)—,—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—CO—NR²²—(CR²²R²³)_(s)— or—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—NR²²—CO—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—;R¹ represents hydrogen, halo, cyano, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy,—C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein eachC₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups,—NR⁴R⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —NR⁴R⁵, —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵, —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl-NR⁴R⁵, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted withR⁶, —C(═O)—R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁶, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —P(═O)(OH)₂ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂;R^(3a) represents hydrogen, chlorine, hydroxyl, or C₁₋₆alkoxy;R³ represents hydroxyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkoxysubstituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl,haloC₁₋₆alkyl optionally substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl,hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl optionally substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl,hydroxyC₂₋₆alkenyl, hydroxyC₂₋₆alkynyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl,cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted withC₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-O—C(═O)—, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted withC₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-C(═O)—, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl mayoptionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with—O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₂₋₆alkynylsubstituted with C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹ andoptionally substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —C(═O)—R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R⁹, C₂₋₆alkenylsubstituted with R⁹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹,C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted withhydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with one or two halogensand —NR¹⁰R¹¹, —C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹², C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹,—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R¹³, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OH)₂ orC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂;R⁴ and R⁵ each independently represent hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl mayoptionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups,—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,—C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R¹³ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R¹³;R⁶ represents C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, phenyl, 4 to 7-memberedmonocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected fromN, O or S; said C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, phenyl, 4 to7-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl, optionally and each independentlybeing substituted by 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents, each substituentindependently being selected from cyano, C₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl,hydroxyl, carboxyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, halogen, haloC₁₋₆alkyl,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl-O—C(═O)—, —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl,—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵;R⁷ and R⁸ each independently represent hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl,hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl orC₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl;R⁹ represents C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, phenyl, naphthyl, or 3to 12 membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at leastone heteroatom selected from N, O or S, said C₃₋₈cycloalkyl,C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, phenyl, naphthyl, or 3 to 12 membered monocyclic orbicyclic heterocyclyl each optionally and each independently beingsubstituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents, each substituentindependently being selected from ═O, C₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl,hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, cyano, cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkyl-O—C(═O)—, C₁₋₄alkylsubstituted with C₁₋₄alkyl-O—C(═O)—, C₁₋₄alkyl-C(═O)—,C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl wherein each C₁₋₄alkyl may optionally be substitutedwith one or two hydroxyl groups, halogen, haloC₁₋₄alkyl,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkyl, —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkyl substitutedwith —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkoxy,—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₄alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₄alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkylsubstituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,R¹³, —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with R¹³, phenyl optionallysubstituted with R¹⁶ phenylC₁₋₆alkyl wherein the phenyl is optionallysubstituted with R¹⁶, a 5 or 6-membered aromatic monocyclic heterocyclylcontaining at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S wherein saidheterocyclyl is optionally substituted with R¹⁶;or when two of the substituents of R⁹ are attached to the same atom,they may be taken together to form a 4 to 7-membered saturatedmonocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected fromN, O or S;R¹⁰ and R¹¹ each independently represent hydrogen, carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl,cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein eachC₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups,R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, —C(═O)—R⁶, —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl,—C(═O)-hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, —C(═O)-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,—C(═O)-hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃,—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with carboxyl, orC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵;R¹² represents hydrogen or C₁₋₄alkyl optionally substituted withC₁₋₄alkoxy;R¹³ represents C₃₋₈cycloalkyl or a saturated 4 to 6-membered monocyclicheterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S,wherein said C₃₋₈cycloalkyl or monocyclic heterocyclyl is optionallysubstituted with 1, 2 or 3 substituents each independently selected fromhalogen, hydroxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, ═O, cyano,—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, or —NR¹⁴R¹⁵;R¹⁴ and R¹⁵ each independently represent hydrogen, or haloC₁₋₄alkyl, orC₁₋₄alkyl optionally substituted with a substituent selected fromhydroxyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, amino or mono- or di(C₁₋₄alkyl)amino;R¹⁶ represents hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, —NR¹⁴R¹⁵or —C(═O)NR¹⁴R¹⁵;R¹⁸ represents hydrogen, C₁₋₆ alkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄alkylsubstituted with C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl;R¹⁹ represents hydrogen; C₁₋₆ alkyl; C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl; C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —O—R²⁰; —(CH₂)_(r)—CN; —(CH₂)_(r)—CONR²⁰R²¹;—(CH₂)_(r1)—NR²⁰R²¹; —(CH₂)_(r1)—NR²⁰COR²¹;—(CH₂)_(r1)—NR²⁰—(CH₂)_(s)—SO₂—R²¹; —(CH₂)_(r)—NH—SO₂—NR²⁰R²¹;—(CH₂)_(r1)—NR²⁰CO₂R²¹; —(CH₂)_(r)—SO₂NR²⁰R²¹; phenyl optionallysubstituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents each independentlyselected from halogen, C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkyloxy, cyano or amino; a 5- or6-membered aromatic monocyclic heterocycle containing at least oneheteroatom selected from N, O or S, said heterocycle being optionallysubstituted with 1, 2, 3 or 4 substituents each independently selectedfrom halogen, C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkyloxy, cyano or amino; wherein said C₁₋₆alkyl and C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, may be optionally substituted by one or moreR²⁰ groupsR²⁰ and R²¹ independently represent hydrogen, C₁₋₆ alkyl,hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, —(CH₂)_(n)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, or when attached to a nitrogenatom R²⁰ and R²¹ can be taken together to form with the nitrogen atom towhich they are attached a monocyclic saturated 4, 5 or 6-membered ringwhich optionally contains a further heteroatom selected from O, S or N;R²² and R²³ independently represent hydrogen, C₁₋₆ alkyl, orhydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl;m independently represents an integer equal to 0, 1 or 2;n independently represents an integer equal to 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4;s independently represents an integer equal to 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4;r independently represent an integer equal to 1, 2, 3, or 4;r1 independently represent an integer equal to 2, 3 or 4;the N-oxides thereof, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof orthe solvates thereof.

WO2006/092430, WO2008/003702, WO01/68047, WO2005/007099, WO2004/098494,WO02009/141386, WO 2004/030635, WO 2008/141065, WO 2011/026579, WO2011/028947, WO 00/42026, US2008/0116789, WO2010/084152, US2009/0054304,WO02008/150827, WO2006/066361, WO2011064250, WO2007/125405 andWO2011/135376 which each disclose a series of heterocyclyl derivatives.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION

Unless the context indicates otherwise, references to formula (I) in allsections of this document (including the uses, methods and other aspectsof the invention) include references to all other sub-formula,sub-groups (e.g. I-A, I-B, I-C or I-D), preferences, embodiments andexamples as defined herein.

The prefix “C_(x-y),” (where x and y are integers) as used herein refersto the number of carbon atoms in a given group. Thus, a C₁₋₆alkyl groupcontains from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, a C₃₋₆cycloalkyl group contains from3 to 6 carbon atoms, a C₁₋₄alkoxy group contains from 1 to 4 carbonatoms, and so on.

The term ‘halo’ or ‘halogen’ as used herein refers to a fluorine,chlorine, bromine or iodine atom.

The term ‘C₁₋₄alkyl’, or ‘C₁₋₆alkyl’ as used herein as a group or partof a group refers to a linear or branched saturated hydrocarbon groupcontaining from 1 to 4 or 1 to 6 carbon atoms. Examples of such groupsinclude methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, isobutyl,sec-butyl, tert-butyl, n-pentyl, isopentyl, neopentyl or hexyl and thelike.

The term ‘C₂₋₄alkenyl’ or ‘C₂₋₆alkenyl’ as used herein as a group orpart of a group refers to a linear or branched hydrocarbon groupcontaining from 2 to 4 or 2 to 6 carbon atoms and containing a carboncarbon double bond.

The term ‘C₂₋₄alkenediyl’ as used herein as a group or part of a grouprefers to a linear or branched bivalent hydrocarbon group containingfrom 2 to 4 carbon atoms and containing a carbon carbon double bond.

The term ‘C₂₋₄alkynyl’ or ‘C₂₋₆alkynyl’ as used herein as a group orpart of a group refers to a linear or branched hydrocarbon group havingfrom 2 to 4 or 2 to 6 carbon atoms and containing a carbon carbon triplebond.

The term ‘C₁₋₄alkoxy’ or ‘C₁₋₆alkoxy’ as used herein as a group or partof a group refers to an —O—C₁₋₄alkyl group or an —O—C₁₋₆alkyl groupwherein C₁₋₄alkyl and C₁₋₆alkyl are as defined herein. Examples of suchgroups include methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, butoxy, and the like.

The term ‘C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl’ or ‘C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl’ as used hereinas a group or part of a group refers to a C₁₋₄alkyl-O—C₁₋₄alkyl group ora C₁₋₆alkyl-O—C₁₋₆alkyl group wherein C₁₋₄alkyl and C₁₋₆alkyl are asdefined herein. Examples of such groups include methoxyethyl,ethoxyethyl, propoxymethyl, butoxypropyl, and the like.

The term ‘C₃₋₈cycloalkyl’ as used herein refers to a saturatedmonocyclic hydrocarbon ring of 3 to 8 carbon atoms. Examples of suchgroups include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl,cycloheptyl or cyclooctyl and the like.

The term ‘C₃-8cycloalkenyl’ as used herein refers to a monocyclichydrocarbon ring of 3 to 8 carbon atoms having a carbon carbon doublebond.

The term ‘hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl’ or ‘hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl’ as used herein as agroup or part of a group refers to a C₁₋₄alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl group asdefined herein wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replacedwith a hydroxyl group. The terms ‘hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl’ or‘hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl’ therefore include monohydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl,monohydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl and also polyhydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl andpolyhydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl. There may be one, two, three or more hydrogenatoms replaced with a hydroxyl group, so the hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl orhydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl may have one, two, three or more hydroxyl groups.Examples of such groups include hydroxymethyl, hydroxyethyl,hydroxypropyl and the like.

The term ‘haloC₁₋₄alkyl’ or ‘haloC₁₋₆alkyl’ as used herein as a group orpart of a group refers to a C₁₋₄alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl group as definedherein wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with ahalogen. The term ‘haloC₁₋₄alkyl’ or ‘haloC₁₋₆alkyl’ therefore includemonohaloC₁₋₄alkyl, monohaloC₁₋₆alkyl and also polyhaloC₁₋₄alkyl andpolyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl. There may be one, two, three or more hydrogen atomsreplaced with a halogen, so the haloC₁₋₄alkyl or haloC₁₋₆alkyl may haveone, two, three or more halogens. Examples of such groups includefluoroethyl, fluoromethyl, trifluoromethyl or trifluoroethyl and thelike.

The term ‘hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkyl’ or ‘hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl’ as used hereinas a group or part of a group refers to a C₁₋₄alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl groupas defined herein wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replacedwith a hydroxyl group and one or more than one hydrogen atom is replacedwith a halogen. The term ‘hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkyl’ or‘hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl’ therefore refers to a C₁₋₄alkyl or C₁₋₆alkylgroup wherein one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with ahydroxyl group and one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replacedwith a halogen.

The term ‘hydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy’ or ‘hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy’ as used herein as agroup or part of a group refers to an —O—C₁₋₄alkyl group or an—O—C₁₋₆alkyl group wherein the C₁₋₄alkyl and C₁₋₆alkyl group is asdefined above and one or more than one hydrogen atom of the C₁₋₄alkyl orC₁₋₆alkyl group is replaced with a hydroxyl group. The term‘hydroxy-C₁₋₄alkoxy’ or ‘hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy’ therefore includemonohydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy, monohydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy and alsopolyhydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy and polyhydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy. There may be one, two,three or more hydrogen atoms replaced with a hydroxyl group so thehydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy or hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy may have one, two, three or morehydroxyl groups. Examples of such groups include hydroxymethoxy,hydroxyethoxy, hydroxypropoxy and the like.

The term ‘haloC₁₋₄alkoxy’ or ‘haloC₁₋₆alkoxy’ as used herein as a groupor part of a group refers to a —O—C₁₋₄alkyl group or a —O—C₁₋₆ alkylgroup as defined herein wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom isreplaced with a halogen. The terms ‘haloC₁₋₄alkoxy’ or ‘haloC₁₋₆alkoxy’therefore include monohaloC₁₋₄alkoxy, monohaloC₁₋₆alkoxy and alsopolyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxy and polyhaloC₁₋₆alkoxy. There may be one, two, threeor more hydrogen atoms replaced with a halogen, so the haloC₁₋₄alkoxy orhaloC₁₋₆alkoxy may have one, two, three or more halogens. Examples ofsuch groups include fluoroethyloxy, difluoromethoxy or trifluoromethoxyand the like.

The term ‘hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxy’ as used herein as a group or part of agroup refers to an —O—C₁₋₄alkyl group wherein the C₁₋₄alkyl group is asdefined herein and wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom isreplaced with a hydroxyl group and one or more than one hydrogen atom isreplaced with a halogen. The term ‘hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxy’ thereforerefers to a —O—C₁₋₄alkyl group wherein one, two, three or more hydrogenatoms are replaced with a hydroxyl group and one, two, three or morehydrogen atoms are replaced with a halogen.

The term ‘haloC₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl’ as used herein as a group or part ofa group refers to a C₁₋₄alkyl-O—C₁₋₄alkyl group wherein C₁₋₄alkyl is asdefined herein and wherein in one or both of the C₁₋₄alkyl groups one ormore than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The term‘haloC₁₋₄ alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl’ therefore refers to a C₁₋₄alkyl-O—C₁₋₄alkylgroup wherein in one or both of the C₁₋₄alkyl groups one, two, three ormore hydrogen atoms are replaced with a halogen and wherein C₁₋₄ alkylis as defined herein. Preferably, in one of the C₁₋₄alkyl groups one ormore than one hydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. Preferably,haloC₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl means C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with haloC₁₋₄alkoxy.

The term ‘hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl’ as used herein refers to aC₁₋₄alkyl-O—C₁₋₄alkyl group wherein C₁₋₄alkyl is as defined herein andwherein in one or both of the C₁₋₄alkyl groups one or more than onehydrogen atom is replaced with a hydroxyl group and one or more than onehydrogen atom is replaced with a halogen. The terms‘hydroxyhalo-C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl’ therefore refers to aC₁₋₄alkyl-O—C₁₋₄alkyl group wherein in one or both of the C₁₋₄alkylgroups one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replaced with ahydroxyl group and one, two, three or more hydrogen atoms are replacedwith a halogen and wherein C₁₋₄alkyl is as defined herein.

The term ‘hydroxyC₂₋₆alkenyl’ as used herein refers to a C₂₋₆alkenylgroup wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with ahydroxyl group and wherein C₂₋₆alkenyl is as defined herein.

The term ‘hydroxyC₂₋₆alkynyl’ as used herein refers to a C₂₋₆alkynylgroup wherein one or more than one hydrogen atom is replaced with ahydroxyl group and wherein C₂₋₆alkynyl is as defined herein.

The term phenylC₁₋₆alkyl as used herein refers to a C₁₋₆alkyl group asdefined herein which is substituted with one phenyl group.

The term cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl or cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl as used herein refers to aC₁₋₄alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl group as defined herein which is substituted withone cyano group.

The term “heterocyclyl” as used herein shall, unless the contextindicates otherwise, include both aromatic and non-aromatic ringsystems. Thus, for example, the term “heterocyclyl group” includeswithin its scope aromatic, non-aromatic, unsaturated, partiallysaturated and fully saturated heterocyclyl ring systems. In general,unless the context indicates otherwise, such groups may be monocyclic orbicyclic and may contain, for example, 3 to 12 ring members, moreusually 5 to 10 ring members. Reference to 4 to 7 ring members include4, 5, 6 or 7 atoms in the ring and reference to 4 to 6 ring membersinclude 4, 5, or 6 atoms in the ring. Examples of monocyclic groups aregroups containing 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 and 8 ring members, more usually 3 to 7,and preferably 5, 6 or 7 ring members, more preferably 5 or 6 ringmembers. Examples of bicyclic groups are those containing 8, 9, 10, 11and 12 ring members, and more usually 9 or 10 ring members. Wherereference is made herein to heterocyclyl groups, the heterocyclyl ringcan, unless the context indicates otherwise, be optionally substituted(i.e. unsubstituted or substituted) by one or more substituents asdiscussed herein.

The heterocyclyl groups can be heteroaryl groups having from 5 to 12ring members, more usually from 5 to 10 ring members. The term“heteroaryl” is used herein to denote a heterocyclyl group havingaromatic character. The term “heteroaryl” embraces polycyclic (e.g.bicyclic) ring systems wherein one or more rings are non-aromatic,provided that at least one ring is aromatic. In such polycyclic systems,the group may be attached by the aromatic ring, or by a non-aromaticring.

Examples of heteroaryl groups are monocyclic and bicyclic groupscontaining from five to twelve ring members, and more usually from fiveto ten ring members. The heteroaryl group can be, for example, a fivemembered or six membered monocyclic ring or a bicyclic structure formedfrom fused five and six membered rings or two fused six membered rings,or two fused five membered rings. Each ring may contain up to about fiveheteroatoms typically selected from nitrogen, sulphur and oxygen.Typically the heteroaryl ring will contain up to 4 heteroatoms, moretypically up to 3 heteroatoms, more usually up to 2, for example asingle heteroatom. In one embodiment, the heteroaryl ring contains atleast one ring nitrogen atom. The nitrogen atoms in the heteroaryl ringscan be basic, as in the case of an imidazole or pyridine, or essentiallynon-basic as in the case of an indole or pyrrole nitrogen. In generalthe number of basic nitrogen atoms present in the heteroaryl group,including any amino group substituents of the ring, will be less thanfive.

Examples of five membered heteroaryl groups include but are not limitedto pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, furazan, oxazole, oxadiazole,oxatriazole, isoxazole, thiazole, thiadiazole, isothiazole, pyrazole,triazole and tetrazole groups.

Examples of six membered heteroaryl groups include but are not limitedto pyridine, pyrazine, pyridazine, pyrimidine and triazine.

A bicyclic heteroaryl group may be, for example, a group selected from:

-   -   a) a benzene ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 1,        2 or 3 ring heteroatoms;    -   b) a pyridine ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing        0, 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms;    -   c) a pyrimidine ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing        0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms;    -   d) a pyrrole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 0,        1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms;    -   e) a pyrazole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing        0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms;    -   f) an imidazole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing        0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms;    -   g) an oxazole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing        0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms;    -   h) an isoxazole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing        0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms;    -   i) a thiazole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing        0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms;    -   j) an isothiazole ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring        containing 0, 1 or 2 ring heteroatoms;    -   k) a thiophene ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing        0, 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms;    -   l) a furan ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing 0,        1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms;    -   m) a cyclohexyl ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring containing        1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms; and    -   n) a cyclopentyl ring fused to a 5- or 6-membered ring        containing 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms.

Particular examples of bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing a fivemembered ring fused to another five membered ring include but are notlimited to imidazothiazole (e.g. imidazo[2,1-b]thiazole) andimidazoimidazole (e.g. imidazo[1,2-a]imidazole).

Particular examples of bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing a sixmembered ring fused to a five membered ring include but are not limitedto benzofuran, benzothiophene, benzimidazole, benzoxazole,isobenzoxazole, benzisoxazole, benzthiazole, benzisothiazole,isobenzofuran, indole, isoindole, indolizine, indoline, isoindoline,purine (e.g., adenine, guanine), indazole, pyrazolopyrimidine (e.g.pyrazolo[1,5-a]pyrimidine), triazolopyrimidine (e.g.[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrimidine), benzodioxole, imidazopyridine andpyrazolopyridine (e.g. pyrazolo[1,5-a]pyridine) groups.

Particular examples of bicyclic heteroaryl groups containing two fusedsix membered rings include but are not limited to quinoline,isoquinoline, chroman, thiochroman, chromene, isochromene, chroman,isochroman, benzodioxan, quinolizine, benzoxazine, benzodiazine,pyridopyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, phthalazine,naphthyridine and pteridine groups.

Examples of polycyclic heteroaryl groups containing an aromatic ring anda non-aromatic ring include, tetrahydroisoquinoline,tetrahydroquinoline, dihydrobenzthiene, dihydrobenzfuran,2,3-dihydro-benzo[1,4]dioxine, benzo[1,3]dioxole,4,5,6,7-tetrahydrobenzofuran, tetrahydrotriazolopyrazine (e.g.5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-[1,2,4]triazolo[4,3-a]pyrazine), indoline and indanegroups.

A nitrogen-containing heteroaryl ring must contain at least one ringnitrogen atom. Each ring may, in addition, contain up to about fourother heteroatoms typically selected from nitrogen, sulphur and oxygen.Typically the heteroaryl ring will contain up to 3 heteroatoms, forexample 1, 2 or 3, more usually up to 2 nitrogens, for example a singlenitrogen. The nitrogen atoms in the heteroaryl rings can be basic, as inthe case of an imidazole or pyridine, or essentially non-basic as in thecase of an indole or pyrrole nitrogen. In general the number of basicnitrogen atoms present in the heteroaryl group, including any aminogroup substituents of the ring, will be less than five.

Examples of nitrogen-containing heteroaryl groups include, but are notlimited to, pyridyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, oxadiazolyl,thiadiazolyl, oxatriazolyl, isoxazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl,furazanyl, pyrazolyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyridazinyl, triazinyl,triazolyl (e.g., 1,2,3-triazolyl, 1,2,4-triazolyl), tetrazolyl,quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, benzimidazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazole,benzthiazolyl and benzisothiazole, indolyl, 3H-indolyl, isoindolyl,indolizinyl, isoindolinyl, purinyl (e.g., adenine [6-aminopurine],guanine [2-amino-6-hydroxypurine]), indazolyl, quinolizinyl,benzoxazinyl, benzodiazinyl, pyridopyridinyl, quinoxalinyl,quinazolinyl, cinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, naphthyridinyl and pteridinyl.

Examples of nitrogen-containing polycyclic heteroaryl groups containingan aromatic ring and a non-aromatic ring includetetrahydroisoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, and indolinyl.

The term “non-aromatic group” embraces, unless the context indicatesotherwise, unsaturated ring systems without aromatic character,partially saturated and fully saturated heterocyclyl ring systems. Theterms “unsaturated” and “partially saturated” refer to rings wherein thering structure(s) contains atoms sharing more than one valence bond i.e.the ring contains at least one multiple bond e.g. a C═C, C≡C or N═Cbond. The term “fully saturated” refers to rings where there are nomultiple bonds between ring atoms. Saturated heterocyclyl groups includepiperidine, morpholine, thiomorpholine, piperazine. Partially saturatedheterocyclyl groups include pyrazolines, for example 2-pyrazoline and3-pyrazoline.

Examples of non-aromatic heterocyclyl groups are groups having from 3 to12 ring members, more usually 5 to 10 ring members. Such groups can bemonocyclic or bicyclic, for example, and typically have from 1 to 5heteroatom ring members (more usually 1, 2, 3 or 4 heteroatom ringmembers), usually selected from nitrogen, oxygen and sulphur. Theheterocyclyl groups can contain, for example, cyclic ether moieties(e.g. as in tetrahydrofuran and dioxane), cyclic thioether moieties(e.g. as in tetrahydrothiophene and dithiane), cyclic amine moieties(e.g. as in pyrrolidine), cyclic amide moieties (e.g. as inpyrrolidone), cyclic thioamides, cyclic thioesters, cyclic ureas (e.g.as in imidazolidin-2-one) cyclic ester moieties (e.g. as inbutyrolactone), cyclic sulphones (e.g. as in sulpholane and sulpholene),cyclic sulphoxides, cyclic sulphonamides and combinations thereof (e.g.thiomorpholine).

Particular examples include morpholine, piperidine (e.g. 1-piperidinyl,2-piperidinyl, 3-piperidinyl and 4-piperidinyl), piperidone, pyrrolidine(e.g. 1-pyrrolidinyl, 2-pyrrolidinyl and 3-pyrrolidinyl), pyrrolidone,azetidine, pyran (2H-pyran or 4H-pyran), dihydrothiophene, dihydropyran,dihydrofuran, dihydrothiazole, tetrahydrofuran, tetrahydrothiophene,dioxane, tetrahydropyran (e.g. 4-tetrahydro pyranyl), imidazoline,imidazolidinone, oxazoline, thiazoline, 2-pyrazoline, pyrazolidine,piperazone, piperazine, and N-alkyl piperazines such as N-methylpiperazine. In general, preferred non-aromatic heterocyclyl groupsinclude saturated groups such as piperidine, pyrrolidine, azetidine,morpholine, piperazine and N-alkyl piperazines.

In a nitrogen-containing non-aromatic heterocyclyl ring the ring mustcontain at least one ring nitrogen atom. The heterocylic groups cancontain, for example cyclic amine moieties (e.g. as in pyrrolidine),cyclic amides (such as a pyrrolidinone, piperidone or caprolactam),cyclic sulphonamides (such as an isothiazolidine 1,1-dioxide,[1,2]thiazinane 1,1-dioxide or [1,2]thiazepane 1,1-dioxide) andcombinations thereof. Particular examples of nitrogen-containingnon-aromatic heterocyclyl groups include aziridine, morpholine,thiomorpholine, piperidine (e.g. 1-piperidinyl, 2-piperidinyl,3-piperidinyl and 4-piperidinyl), pyrrolidine (e.g. 1-pyrrolidinyl,2-pyrrolidinyl and 3-pyrrolidinyl), pyrrolidone, dihydrothiazole,imidazoline, imidazolidinone, oxazoline, thiazoline,6H-1,2,5-thiadiazine, 2-pyrazoline, 3-pyrazoline, pyrazolidine,piperazine, and N-alkyl piperazines such as N-methyl piperazine.

The heterocyclyl groups can be polycyclic fused ring systems or bridgedring systems such as the oxa- and aza analogues of bicycloalkanes,tricycloalkanes (e.g. adamantane and oxa-adamantane). For an explanationof the distinction between fused and bridged ring systems, see AdvancedOrganic Chemistry, by Jerry March, 4^(th) Edition, Wiley Interscience,pages 131-133, 1992.

The heterocyclyl groups can each be unsubstituted or substituted by oneor more substituent groups. For example, heterocyclyl groups can beunsubstituted or substituted by 1, 2, 3 or 4 substituents. Where theheterocyclyl group is monocyclic or bicyclic, typically it isunsubstituted or has 1, 2 or 3 substituents.

The term “carbocyclyl” as used herein shall, unless the contextindicates otherwise, include both aromatic and non-aromatic ringsystems. Thus, for example, the term “carbocyclyl group” includes withinits scope aromatic, non-aromatic, unsaturated, partially saturated andfully saturated carbocyclyl ring systems. In general, unless the contextindicates otherwise, such groups may be monocyclic or bicyclic and maycontain, for example, 3 to 12 ring members, more usually 5 to 10 ringmembers. Reference to 4 to 7 ring members include 4, 5, 6 or 7 atoms inthe ring and reference to 4 to 6 ring members include 4, 5, or 6 atomsin the ring. Examples of monocyclic groups are groups containing 3, 4,5, 6, 7 and 8 ring members, more usually 3 to 7, and preferably 5, 6 or7 ring members, more preferably 5 or 6 ring members. Examples ofbicyclic groups are those containing 8, 9, 10, 11 and 12 ring members,and more usually 9 or 10 ring members. Where reference is made herein tocarbocyclyl groups, the carbocyclyl ring can, unless the contextindicates otherwise, be optionally substituted (i.e. unsubstituted orsubstituted) by one or more substituents as discussed herein.

The term carbocyclyl comprises aryl, C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl.

The term aryl as used herein refers to carbocyclyl aromatic groupsincluding phenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, and tetrahydronaphthyl groups.

Whenever used hereinbefore or hereinafter that substituents can beselected each independently out of a list of numerous definitions, allpossible combinations are intended which are chemically possible.Whenever used hereinbefore or hereinafter that a particular substituentis further substituted with two or more groups, such as for examplehydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxy, all possible combinationsare intended which are chemically possible.

In one embodiment, the invention relates to a compound of formula (I-A).

In one embodiment, the invention relates to a compound of formula (I-A)wherein X¹ is N, and X² is CR^(3a), in particular wherein R^(3a)represents hydrogen. In one embodiment, the invention relates to acompound of formula (I-A) wherein X² is N and X¹ is CR^(3a); inparticular wherein R^(3a) represents hydrogen.

In one embodiment, the invention relates to a compound of formula (I-B),in particular wherein R^(3a) represents hydrogen.

In one embodiment, Y represents —CR¹⁸═N—OR¹⁹. In particular wherein R¹⁸and R¹⁹ represent C₁₋₆alkyl.

In one embodiment, Y represents -E-D wherein E represents a bond.

In one embodiment, Y represents a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic orbicyclic carbocyclyl or a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclicheterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S,wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionallysubstituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, Y represents a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic orbicyclic carbocyclyl or a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclicheterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S,wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionallysubstituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, Y represents an aromatic 3 to 12, in particular anaromatic 5 to 12, ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or anaromatic 3 to 12, in particular an aromatic 5 to 12, ring memberedmonocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatomselected from N, O or S, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl mayeach be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹groups.

In one embodiment, Y represents an aromatic 3 to 12 (e.g. 5 to 10) ringmembered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl, wherein said carbocyclylmay be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, Y represents phenyl or naphthyl, wherein said phenylor naphthyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, Y represents a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic orbicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected fromN, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substitutedby one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, Y represents an aromatic 5 to 12 ring memberedmonocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected fromN, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl group may each be optionallysubstituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, Y represents a 5 or 6 ring membered monocyclicheterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S,wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one ormore (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, Y represents an aromatic 5 or 6 ring memberedmonocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected fromN, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substitutedby one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, Y represents a 5 ring membered monocyclicheterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S,wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one ormore (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, Y represents a 5 ring membered monocyclic aromaticheterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S,wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one ormore (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, Y represents pyrazolyl (e.g. pyrazol-4yl), whereinsaid pyrazolyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g.1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, Y represents a 6 ring membered monocyclicheterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S,wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one ormore (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, Y represents a 6 ring membered monocyclic aromaticheterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S,wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one ormore (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, Y represents a 12 ring membered bicyclic heterocyclylcontaining at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein saidheterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1,2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment, Y represents a 12 ring membered bicyclic aromaticheterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S,wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one ormore (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups.

In one embodiment Y represents

wherein R¹ represents hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl,hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl,C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substitutedwith one or two hydroxyl groups, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR⁴R⁵,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl,—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —C(═O)—R⁶, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—P(═O)(OH)₂ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂; and eachR^(1a) is independently selected from hydrogen, C₁₋₄alkyl,hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with amino or mono- ordi(C₁₋₄alkyl)amino or —NH(C₃₋₈cycloalkyl), cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl,C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, and C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with one or more fluoroatoms. In one embodiment R^(1a) is independently selected from hydrogenand C₁₋₄alkyl. In one embodiment R^(1a) is hydrogen.

In one embodiment, Y represents

wherein R¹ represents hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl,hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substitutedwith one or two hydroxyl groups, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR⁴R⁵,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl,—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —C(═O)—R⁶, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—P(═O)(OH)₂ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂.

In one embodiment, E represents a bond, C₂₋₄alkenediyl optionallysubstituted with R²², —CO—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—, —(CR²²R²³)_(s)—CO—,—NR²²—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—, —(CR²²R²³)_(s)—NR²²—, —O—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—,—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—CO—NR²²—(CR²²R²³)_(s)— or—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—NR²²—CO—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—.

In one embodiment, E represents a bond, C₂₋₄alkenediyl,—CO—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—, —(CR²²R²³)_(s)—CO—, —NR²²—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—,—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—NR²²—, —(CR²²R²³)_(s)—CO—NR²²—(CR²²R²³)_(s)— or—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—NR²²—CO—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—.

In one embodiment, E represents C₂₋₄alkenediyl, —CO—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—,—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—CO—, —NR²²—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—, —(CR²²R²³)_(s)—NR²²—,—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—CO—NR²²—(CR²²R²³)_(s)— or—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—NR²²—CO—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—.

In one embodiment, E represents a bond.

In one embodiment, Y represents -E-D, wherein E is other than a bond.

In one embodiment, Y represents -E-D, wherein E is other than a bond andD represents any one of the following:

-   -   a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a        3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl        containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S,        wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally        substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups;    -   a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a        5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl        containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S,        wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each be optionally        substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups;    -   phenyl or naphthyl, wherein said phenyl or naphthyl may each be        optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹        groups;    -   a 5 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl        containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S,        wherein said heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by        one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups;    -   a 5 or 6 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at        least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said        heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more        (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups;    -   a 5 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least        one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said        heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more        (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups;    -   a 5 ring membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl containing at        least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said        heterocyclyl group may each be optionally substituted by one or        more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups;    -   a 6 ring membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least        one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said        heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more        (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups;    -   a 6 ring membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl containing at        least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said        heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more        (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups;    -   a 12 ring membered bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one        heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said heterocyclyl        may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2        or 3) R¹ groups;    -   a 12 ring membered bicyclic aromatic heterocyclyl containing at        least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, wherein said        heterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more        (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups;

wherein R¹ represents hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl,hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl,C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substitutedwith one or two hydroxyl groups, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR⁴R⁵,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl,—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —C(═O)—R⁶, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—P(═O)(OH)₂ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂; and eachR^(1a) is independently selected from hydrogen, C₁₋₄alkyl,hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with amino or mono- ordi(C₁₋₄alkyl)amino or —NH(C₃₋₈cycloalkyl), cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl,C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, and C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with one or more fluoroatoms;

wherein R¹ represents hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl,hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substitutedwith one or two hydroxyl groups, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR⁴R⁵,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl,—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —C(═O)—R⁶, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—P(═O)(OH)₂ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂.

In one embodiment, D is other than pyrazolyl, in particular D ispiperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl,pyrolopyridinyl, 1,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl,azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl,1,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl,pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionallysubstituted. Said optional substituents may represent halo, cyano,C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, —NR⁴R⁵,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —NR⁴R⁵, —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵, —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl-NR⁴R⁵, R⁶, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with R⁶.

In one embodiment, E is other than a bond and D is other than pyrazolyl,in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl,triazolyl, pyrrolopyridinyl, 1,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl,cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl,1,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl,pyrrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionallysubstituted.

In one embodiment E is a bond and D is an optionally substituted 5 or 6membered aromatic heterocycle. In one embodiment E is a bond and D is anoptionally substituted membered aromatic heterocycle, such as forexample pyrazolyl, optionally substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl. In oneembodiment E is a bond and D is an optionally substituted 6 memberedaromatic heterocycle, such as for example substituted pyridyl orunsubstituted pyridyl.

In one embodiment, E is a bond and D is optionally substituted4-pyrazolyl. In one embodiment, E is a bond and D is 4-pyrazolylsubstituted at the 1 position with C₁₋₆alkyl for example methyl.

In one embodiment, E is a bond and D is 1-pyrazolyl or 2-pyrazolyl, bothmay optionally be substituted. In one embodiment, E is other than a bondand D is 1-pyrazolyl or 2-pyrazolyl, both may optionally be substituted.

In one embodiment, E is other than a bond and D is optionallysubstituted pyrazolyl. In one embodiment, E is a bond and D isoptionally substituted pyrazolyl.

In one embodiment R¹ represents hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl,hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl,C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substitutedwith one or two hydroxyl groups, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR⁴R⁵,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl,—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —C(═O)—R⁶, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—P(═O)(OH)₂ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂.

In one embodiment R¹ represents hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl,hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein eachC₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR⁴R⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl,R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁶,hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—Si(CH₃)₃.

In one embodiment R¹ represents hydrogen.

In one embodiment R¹ represents C₁₋₆alkyl, such as for example methyl,ethyl or isopropyl. In one embodiment R¹ represents methyl.

In one embodiment each R² is independently selected from hydroxyl,halogen, cyano, C₁₋₄alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl,hydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy, haloC₁₋₄alkyl, haloC₁₋₄alkoxy, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl,R¹³, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with R¹³, —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl substitutedwith NR⁷R⁸, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with NR⁷R⁸, —NR⁷R⁸ and —C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸;or when two R² groups are attached to adjacent carbon atoms they may betaken together to form a radical of formula —O—(C(R¹⁷)₂)_(p)—O— whereinR¹⁷ represents hydrogen or fluorine and p represents 1 or 2.

In one embodiment each R² is independently selected from hydroxyl,halogen, cyano, C₁₋₄alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl,hydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy, haloC₁₋₄alkoxy, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, R¹³, C₁₋₄alkoxysubstituted with R¹³, —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with NR⁷R⁸,C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with NR⁷R⁸, —NR⁷R⁸ or —C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸.

In one embodiment one or more R² represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for exampleCH₃O—, or halogen, for example fluoro or chloro.

In one embodiment one or more R² represents CH₃O— or fluoro.

In one embodiment one or more R² represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for exampleCH₃O—.

In one embodiment n is equal to 0. In one embodiment n is equal to 1. Inone embodiment n is equal to 2. In one embodiment n is equal to 3. Inone embodiment n is equal to 4.

In one embodiment, n is equal to 2, 3 or 4.

In one embodiment n is equal to 2 and one R² is present at the3-position and the other is present at the 5-position.

In one embodiment n is equal to 2 and one R² is present at the3-position and the other is present at the 5-position and each R²represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for example each R² represents CH₃O—.

In one embodiment n is equal to 3 and one R² is present at the2-position, one R² is present at the 3-position and one R² is present atthe 5-position.

In one embodiment n is equal to 3 and one R² is present at the3-position and represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for example CH₃O—; one R² ispresent at the 5-position and represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for example CH₃O—;one R² is present at the 2-position and represents halogen, for examplefluoro.

In one embodiment n is equal to 4 and one R² is present at the2-position, one R² is present at the 3-position, one R² is present atthe 5-position and one R² is present at the 6-position.

In one embodiment n is equal to 4 and one R² is present at the3-position and represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for example CH₃O—; one R² ispresent at the 5-position and represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for example CH₃O—;one R² is present at the 2-position and represents halogen, for examplefluoro, and one R² is present at the 6-position and represents halogen,for example fluoro.

In one embodiment, R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₂₋₆alkynyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyloptionally substituted (e.g. substituted) with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl whereineach C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxylgroups, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally besubstituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith one or two halogens and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹ and optionallysubstituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyland R⁹, —C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹², —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁹, C₂₋₆alkenylsubstituted with R^(9g), C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹,hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl, R¹³, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-C(═O)— or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂.

In one embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl mayoptionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with hydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with oneor two halogens and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R⁹,—C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹², C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹,hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl, R¹³ or C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-C(═O)—.

In one embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl,haloC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl optionally substituted with—O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₂₋₆alkynyl, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein eachC₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groupsor with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹,cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with hydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with oneor two halo atoms and —NR¹⁰R¹¹. C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted withC₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-C(═O)—, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted withcarboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹ and substituted with—O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R⁹,—C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹², —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁹, C₂₋₆alkenylsubstituted with R⁹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹,C₁₋₆alkyloxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally besubstituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl,R¹³, or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂.

In one embodiment, R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl mayoptionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with hydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with oneor two halogens and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R⁹, —C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹²,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—R⁹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy,C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl or R¹³.

In one embodiment R³ represents C₂₋₆alkynyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl optionallysubstituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl optionallysubstituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substitutedwith one or two hydroxyl groups or with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with R⁹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹.

In one embodiment R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹,C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, or C₂₋₆alkynyl.

In one embodiment R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹,C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substitutedwith one or two hydroxyl groups or with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, orC₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, C₂₋₆alkynyl.

In one embodiment R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹,C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl, or C₂₋₆alkynyl.

In one embodiment R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl,haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₂₋₆alkynyl or R¹³.

In one embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹ or R¹³.

In one embodiment R³ represents C₂₋₆alkynyl. R³ may represent —CH₂—C≡C—H

In one embodiment when R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl (e.g. C₁₋₄alkyl)substituted with R⁹. R⁹ represents an optionally substituted aromatic 5or 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl, for example optionallysubstituted imidazolyl.

In one embodiment when R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl (e.g. C₁₋₄alkyl)substituted with R⁹, wherein R⁹ represents an optionally substitutedaromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one or twonitrogen heteroatom, for example imidazolyl.

In one embodiment when R³ represents C₁₋₄alkyl (e.g. methyl) substitutedwith R⁹, wherein R⁹ represents unsubstituted imidazolyl (e.g.imidazol-2-yl) or imidazolyl substituted with —S(O)₂—N(CH₃)₂.

In one embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl,halo and/or —NR¹⁰R¹¹. In one embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with hydroxyl, halo or —NR¹⁰R¹¹, wherein the C₁₋₆alkyl groupis a straight chain alkyl group e.g. 2-ethyl, n-propyl, n-butyl. In afurther embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl or—NR¹⁰R¹¹.

In one embodiment R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl. R³ may represent—CH₂CH₂OH or —CH₂CH₂CH₂OH.

In one embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyloxyC₁₋₆alkyl. R³ may represent—CH₂CH₂OCH₃.

In a yet further embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹⁰R¹¹. In one embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with—NR¹⁰R¹¹. In one embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₄alkyl substituted—NR¹⁰R¹¹, wherein the C₁₋₄alkyl group is a straight chain alkyl groupe.g. 2-ethyl, n-propyl. In one embodiment R³ represents C₁₋₄alkylsubstituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, wherein the C₁₋₄alkyl group is an ethyl group(—CH₂CH₂—).

In one embodiment when R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl (e.g. 2-ethyl, n-propyl)substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, wherein R¹⁰ and R¹¹ are independentlyselected from hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl and haloC₁₋₆alkyl (e.g. hydrogen,iso-propyl or —CH₂CF₃).

In one embodiment when R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl (e.g. 2-ethyl, n-propyl)substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, wherein R¹⁰ and R¹¹ are independentlyselected from hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl and C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹⁴R¹⁵. In one embodiment R¹⁴ and R¹⁵ each independently representhydrogen, or C₁₋₄alkyl.

In one embodiment when R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl (e.g. 2-ethyl, n-propyl)substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, wherein R¹⁰ and R¹¹ are independentlyselected from hydrogen, and C₁₋₆alkyl (e.g. hydrogen or iso-propyl).

In one embodiment when R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹⁰R¹¹, and one of R¹⁰ and R¹¹ represents hydrogen and the otherrepresents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵ (e.g. —NR¹⁴R¹⁵ represents—NHCH(CH₃)₂). R³ may represent —CH₂CH₂N(CH(CH₃)₂)CH₂CH₂NHCH(CH₃)₂ or—CH₂CH₂NHCH(CH₃)₂.

In one embodiment when R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹⁰R¹¹, and one of R¹⁰ and R¹¹ represents hydrogen and the otherrepresents C₁₋₆alkyl, for example —CH(CH₃)₂. R³ may represent—CH₂CH₂NHCH(CH₃)₂.

In one embodiment R³ represents —CH₂CH₂NHCH(CH₃)₂.

In one embodiment R³ represents haloC₁₋₆alkyl. In one embodiment R³represents haloC₁₋₄alkyl. In one embodiment R³ represents —CH₂CH₂—Br.

In one embodiment R^(3a) represents hydrogen.

In one embodiment R^(3a) represents chlorine.

In one embodiment, R⁹ is selected from:

an optionally substituted C₃₋₈cycloalkyl,

an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl,

an optionally substituted saturated 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl,

a saturated or an aromatic 3, 4, 5 or 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclylcontaining one or two oxygen heteroatoms,

an optionally substituted 4 membered heterocyclyl containing one oxygenheteroatom,

an optionally substituted aromatic 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclecontaining one or two nitrogen heteroatoms,

a partially saturated 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing onenitrogen heteroatom which may optionally be substituted,

an optionally substituted saturated 4 membered monocyclic heterocyclylcontaining one nitrogen heteroatom,

a saturated 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one nitrogenheteroatom,

a saturated 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one nitrogenheteroatom,

a bicyclic heterocyclyl containing a benzene ring fused to a 5- or6-membered ring containing 1, 2 or 3 ring heteroatoms,

a 4, 5 or 6 membered monocyclic saturated heterocycle substituted withtwo substituents which are attached to the same atom and which are takentogether to form a 4 to 7-membered saturated monocyclic heterocyclylcontaining at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S,an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclylcontaining one sulphur heteroatom,an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclylcontaining one sulphur and one nitrogen heteroatom,a saturated 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing two nitrogenheteroatoms,an aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing four nitrogenheteroatoms,an aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one oxygen andtwo nitrogen heteroatoms,an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclylcontaining two nitrogen heteroatoms,an optionally substituted aromatic 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclylcontaining three nitrogen heteroatoms,a saturated 5 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one nitrogenand one oxygen heteroatom,a saturated 6 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one nitrogenand one sulphur heteroatom,a saturated 7 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing two nitrogenheteroatoms,a saturated 7 membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing one nitrogenand one oxygen heteroatom, andphenyl or naphthyl, in particular phenyl.

In one embodiment, R⁹ represents an optionally substituted 5 memberedaromatic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl, or an optionallysubstituted 6 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for examplepyridyl, pyrimidinyl or pyrazinyl. Optional substituents may representC₁₋₄alkoxy or —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵.

In one embodiment, R⁹ represents C₃₋₆cycloalkyl, such as for examplecyclopropyl, a 3 membered saturated heterocyclyl, such as for exampleoxiranyl, an optionally substituted 5 membered saturated heterocycle,such as for example pyrolidinonyl, an optionally substituted 6 memberedaromatic or saturated heterocycle, such as for example pyridyl,pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, piperazinyl, or morpholinyl, an optionallysubstituted bicyclic heterocycle, such as for example1H-isoindol-1,3-dione. Optional substituents may represent ═O,C₁₋₄alkoxy, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, orC₁₋₄alkyl-C(═O)—.

In one embodiment, R⁹ represents an optionally substituted 6 memberedaromatic heterocycle, such as for example pyridinyl or pyrimidinyl.Optional substituents may represent C₁₋₄alkoxy.

In one embodiment, R⁹ represents an optionally substituted 5 memberedaromatic or saturated heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl,pyrolidinyl, oxazolidinyl. Optional substituents may represent ═O, a 5or 6-membered aromatic monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least oneheteroatom selected from N, O or S wherein said heterocyclyl isoptionally substituted with R¹⁶; or —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵.

In one embodiment, R⁹ represents an optionally substituted 5 memberedaromatic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl. Optionalsubstituents may represent —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵.

In one embodiment, R⁹ represents an optionally substituted 5 memberedaromatic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl, pyrazolyl,oxazolyl or triazolyl; or an optionally substituted 5 membered saturatedheterocycle, such as for example pyrrolidinonyl or tetrahydrofuranyl; oran optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic heterocyle, such as forexample pyrimidinyl. Optional substituents may represent C₁₋₄alkyl, oxo,benzyl or —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵.

In one embodiment, R⁹ represents an optionally substituted 5 memberedaromatic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl or triazolyl; or anoptionally substituted 5 membered saturated heterocycle, such as forexample pyrrolidinonyl.

In one embodiment R¹⁰ represents hydrogen or C₁₋₆alkyl.

In one embodiment R¹⁰ is hydrogen.

In one embodiment R¹¹ represents hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl,—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl,—C(═O)-hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, —C(═O)—R⁶, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, R⁶, —C(═O)—R⁶,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, —C(═O)-halo-C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —Si(CH₃)₃, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkoxy,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, carboxyl, or C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl.

In one embodiment R¹⁰ and R¹¹ represent hydrogen or C₁₋₆alkyl, such asfor example methyl or isopropyl.

In one embodiment, R⁶ represents a 6-membered monocyclic saturatedheterocyclyl which is optionally substituted. For example piperazinyl ormorpholinyl or tetrahydropyranyl, optionally substituted with halogen,C₁₋₆alkyl, or C₁₋₆alkyl-O—C(═O)—.

In one embodiment, R⁶ represents a 6-membered monocyclic aromaticheterocyclyl which is optionally substituted. For example pyridinyl,optionally substituted with halogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, or C₁₋₆alkyl-O—C(═O)—.

In one embodiment, R¹² represents hydrogen or C₁₋₄alkyl optionallysubstituted with C₁₋₄alkyloxy. In one embodiment, R¹³ represents asaturated 4 to 6-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at leastone heteroatom selected from N or O.

In one embodiment, R¹³ represents a saturated 6-membered monocyclicheterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N or O,such as for example piperidinyl.

In one embodiment, R¹⁴ and R¹⁵ each independently represent hydrogen orC₁₋₄alkyl.

In one embodiment, R¹⁴ and R¹⁵ each independently represent C₁₋₄alkyl,such as for example methyl.

In one embodiment, R²² and R²³ each independently represent hydrogen.

In one embodiment of the invention, X¹ represents N and X² representsCH; n represents an integer equal to 2; and each R² representsC₁₋₄alkoxy, for example CH₃O—; R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl,haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl; Y represents -E-D wherein Erepresents a bond and D represents optionally substituted pyrazolyl.

In one embodiment of the invention, X¹ represents N and X² represents CHor X¹ represents CH and X² represents N; n represents an integer equalto 2, 3 or 4; and each R² represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for example CH₃O—, orhalo, for example fluoro or chloro; R^(3a) represents hydrogen orchlorine; R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹,C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹,C₂₋₆alkynyl or R¹³; Y represents -E-D wherein E represents a bond and Drepresents an optionally substituted 5 or 6 membered aromaticheterocycle.

In one embodiment of the invention, X¹ represents N and X² represents CHor X¹ represents CH and X² represents N; n represents an integer equalto 2, 3 or 4; and each R² represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for example CH₃O—, orhalo, for example fluoro or chloro; R^(3a) represents hydrogen orchlorine; R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹,C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹,C₂₋₆alkynyl or R¹³; Y represents -E-D wherein E represents a bond and Drepresents an optionally substituted 5 or 6 membered aromaticheterocycle, such as for example optionally substituted pyrazolyl orpyridyl; R¹ represents hydrogen or C₁₋₆alkyl, for example methyl, ethylor isopropyl; R⁹ represents an optionally substituted 5 memberedaromatic heterocycle, such as for example imidazolyl, pyrazolyl,oxazolyl or triazolyl; or an optionally substituted 5 membered saturatedheterocycle, such as for example pyrrolidinonyl or tetrahydrofuranyl; oran optionally substituted 6 membered aromatic heterocyle, such as forexample pyrimidinyl; R¹⁰ and R¹¹ represent hydrogen or C₁₋₆alkyl, suchas for example methyl or isopropyl; R¹³ represents a saturated6-membered monocyclic heterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatomselected from N or O. In particular, the optional substituents for R⁹are selected from C₁₋₄alkyl, oxo, benzyl or —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, wherein R¹⁴and R¹⁵ for instance each independently represent C₁₋₄alkyl, such as forexample methyl.

In one embodiment of the invention, X¹ represents N and X² representsCH, n represents an integer equal to 2; and each R² representsC₁₋₄alkoxy, for example CH₃O—; R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl,haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl; Y represents -E-D wherein Erepresents a bond and D represents pyrazolyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl;R¹⁰ and R¹¹ represent hydrogen or C₁₋₆alkyl; R⁹ represents an optionallysubstituted 5 membered aromatic heterocycle, such as for exampleoptionally substituted imidazolyl.

In one embodiment, Y is -E-D, wherein E is a bond and D is a 5 or 6membered monocyclic aromatic heterocyclyl, wherein said heterocyclyl mayoptionally be substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups, andwherein one or more of the following applies:

n is 2;

R² is C₁₋₆alkyloxy;

R² is placed in position 3 and 5.

In one embodiment, Y is -E-D, wherein E is a bond and D is piperidinyl,pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl,1,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl,morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl,1,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrrolyl, pyrimidinyl,pyrrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionallysubstituted, more in particular D is piperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl,pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl, pyrolopyridinyl, 1,3-benzodioxolyl,indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl, azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl,oxazolyl, piperazinyl, 1,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl,pyrimidinyl, pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings beingoptionally substituted and n is 2, even more in particular D ispiperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl,pyrolopyridinyl, 1,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl,azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl,1,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl,pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionallysubstituted; n is 2, R² is C₁₋₆alkyloxy, even further in particular D ispiperidinyl, pyridinyl, phenyl, pyrolyl, imidazolyl, triazolyl,pyrolopyridinyl, 1,3-benzodioxolyl, indolyl, thiazolyl, cyclopentyl,azetidinyl, morpholinyl, tetrazolyl, oxazolyl, piperazinyl,1,2,3,6-tetrahydropyridinyl, 2,5-dihydropyrolyl, pyrimidinyl,pyrolidinyl, thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, said rings being optionallysubstituted; n is 2, R² is C₁₋₆alkyloxy and said R² is placed inposition 3 and 5.

In one embodiment there is provided compounds of formula (I-A) or (I-B)including any tautomeric or stereochemically isomeric form thereof,wherein

X¹ is N and X² is CR^(3a);

each R² represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for example CH₃O—;

Y represents -E-D;

D represents a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclylor a 3 to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclylcontaining at least one heteroatom selected from N, O or S, for examplepyrazolyl, wherein said carbocyclyl and heterocyclyl may each beoptionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1, 2 or 3) R¹ groups;E represents a bond;R¹ represents C₁₋₆alkyl, for example —CH₃;R^(3a) represents hydrogen or chlorine;R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl for example —CH₂CH₂OH or —CH₂CH₂CH₂OH,haloC₁₋₆alkyl, for example —CH2CH2Br, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹ forexample —CH₂-substituted with imidazol-2-yl or with imidazol-2-ylsubstituted in the 3 position with —S(O)₂—N(CH₃)₂, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —NR¹⁰R¹¹ for example —CH₂CH₂N(CH(CH₃)₂)CH₂CH₂NHCH(CH₃)₂ or—CH₂CH₂NHCH(CH₃)₂, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl for example —CH₂CH₂OCH₃, orC₂₋₆alkynyl; for example —CH₂C≡C—H;n independently represents an integer equal to 2;the N-oxides thereof, the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof orthe solvates thereof.

In one embodiment the compound of formula (I-A) is a compound of formula(I-C):

wherein n, X¹, X², R¹, R², R³ and R^(3a) are as defined herein. In oneembodiment the compound of formula (I-A) is a compound of formula (I-C)wherein R^(3a) is hydrogen.

In one embodiment the compound of formula (I-A) is a compound of formula(I-D):

wherein n, R¹, R², R³ and R^(3a) are as defined herein. In oneembodiment the compound of formula (I-A) is a compound of formula (I-D)wherein R^(3a) is hydrogen.

In one embodiment the compound of formula (I-B) is a compound of formula(I-E):

wherein n, R¹, R², R³ and R^(3a) are as defined herein. In oneembodiment the compound of formula (I-B) is a compound of formula (I-D)wherein R^(3a) is hydrogen.

In one embodiment, the present invention relates to any one of thefollowing compounds

a N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or asolvate thereof.

In one embodiment, the present invention relates to any one of thefollowing compounds

a N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or asolvate thereof.

For the avoidance of doubt, it is to be understood that each general andspecific preference, embodiment and example for one substituent may becombined, whenever possible, with each general and specific preference,embodiment and example for one or more, preferably, all othersubstituents as defined herein and that all such embodiments areembraced by this application.

Methods for the Preparation of Compounds of Formula (I)

In this section, as in all other sections of this application unless thecontext indicates otherwise, references to formula (I) also include allother sub-groups and examples thereof as defined herein.

In general, compounds of formula (I-A) wherein X¹ is N, and X² isCR^(3a); R^(3a) is hydrogen, Y is D (E is a bond), said compounds beingrepresented by formula (I-Aa), can be prepared according to thefollowing reaction Scheme 1.

In scheme 1, an intermediate of formula (IV) wherein W₂ represents asuitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. chloro and thelike, or —O—SO₂—CF₃, is reacted with an intermediate of formula (V) inthe presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (II)acetate or Pd₂dba₃, a suitable base, such as sodium tert-butoxide orCs₂CO₃, a suitable ligand, such as for example1,1′-[1,1′-binaphthalene]-2,2′-diylbis[1,1-diphenylphosphine] orxantphos, and a suitable solvent or solvent mixture, such as for exampledioxane or ethylene glycol dimethylether and water orN-methyl-pyrrolidone, or tetrahydrofuran or toluene or a mixture ofdioxane and toluene, resulting in an intermediate of formula (VI). Thisreaction can also be performed in the presence of a suitabledeprotonating agent, such as for example potassiumbis(trimethylsilyl)amide, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampletetrahydrofuran. Or alternatively an intermediate of formula (IV) isreacted with an intermediate of formula (V) in the presence of asuitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. n-propanol. Saidintermediate of formula (VI) can then be reacted with an intermediate offormula (VII) wherein W₃ represents a suitable leaving group, such asfor example halo, e.g. bromo and wherein R^(x) and R^(y) representC₁₋₄alkyl, and R^(z) represent C₁₋₄alkyl or phenyl, for instance R^(x)and R^(y) represent CH₃ and R^(z) represents C(CH₃)₃ or phenyl, in thepresence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and asuitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide orN,N-dimethylacetamide, resulting in an intermediate of formula (VIII).Intermediates of formula (VIII) or intermediates of formula (VIII)wherein the R¹ substituent carries a suitable protective group can alsobe prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (IV) or anintermediate of formula (IV) wherein the R¹ substituent carries asuitable protective group with an intermediate of formula (XXIII′)wherein R^(3d′) represent —C₁₋₆alkyl-O—Si(RX)(R^(y))(R^(z)) in thepresence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium (II)acetate, a suitable ligand, such as for exampleracemic-2,2′-bis(diphenylphosphino)-1,1′-binaphtyl, a suitable base,such as for example Cs₂CO₃, and a suitable solvent, such as for example1,2-dimethoxyethane. Intermediates of formula (VIII) can be convertedinto a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents —C₁₋₆alkyl-OH, saidcompounds being represented by formula (I-Aa-a) or compounds of formula(I-Aa) wherein the R¹ substituent carries a suitable protective group,by reaction with tetrabutylammonium fluoride in the presence of asuitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. This type ofreaction can also be performed in the presence of a suitable acid, suchas for example acetic acid or HCl, and a suitable solvent, such as forexample tetrahydrofurane or dioxane. Alternatively, an intermediate offormula (VI) can react with an intermediate of formula (VII′) wherein W₃represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g.bromo and the like, in the presence of a suitable base, such as forexample sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampleN,N-dimethylformamide or N,N-dimethylacetamide, resulting in anintermediate of formula (XXV) which can then be deprotected in thepresence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCl, and a suitablesolvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol or isopropanol,to give a compound of formula (I-Aa-a). The compounds of formula(I-Aa-a) or compounds of formula (I-Aa-a) wherein the R¹ substituentcarries a suitable protective group can be reacted with methanesulfonylchloride in the presence of a suitable base, such as for exampletriethylamine, diisopropylethanamine or N,N-dimethyl-4-aminopyridine,and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane ortetrahydrofuran, to result in an intermediate of formula (IX) (mesylatederivative) or an intermediate of formula (IX′) (chloride derivative) orintermediates of formula (IX) or (IX′) wherein the R¹ substituentcarries a suitable protective group. In particular, this type ofreaction is used to prepare intermediates of formula (IX) or (IX′)wherein C₁₋₆alkyl represents C₃₋₆alkyl. For some variants ofintermediates of formula (IX) or (IX′), e.g. wherein C₁₋₆alkylrepresents C₁₋₂alkyl it might be preferred to perform the reaction innon basic conditions. Intermediates of formula (IX) or (IX′) can then bereacted with an intermediate of formula (X) to obtain a compound offormula (Ia) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with NR¹⁰R¹¹,said compounds being represented by formula (I-Aa-b) or compounds offormula (I-Aa-b) wherein the R¹ substituent carries a suitableprotective group. This reaction may optionally be performed in thepresence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, K₂CO₃,Na₂CO₃ or sodium hydride and optionally a suitable solvent, such as forexample acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran, dioxane, N,N-dimethylformamide,1-methyl-pyrrolidinone, a suitable alcohol, e.g. 1-butanol and the like.This type of reaction can also be performed with a suitable salt of theintermediate of formula (X), e.g. HCl salt of intermediate of formula(X), or may be performed in the presence of potassium iodide. In thisway compounds wherein R³ represents iodoC₁₋₆alkyl can be obtained.Compounds of formula (Ia-b) wherein the R¹ substituent carries asuitable protective group can be converted in a compound of formula(I-Aa-b) by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for exampletrifluoroacetic acid, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as forexample dichloromethane.

Intermediates of formula (IX) can also react with a suitable nitrogencontaining ring within the definition of R⁹, said ring being representedby formula (XXI) or a suitable salt of an intermediate of formula (XXI),in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile,1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone, or an alcohol, e.g. 1-butanol, optionally inthe presence of potassium iodide or a suitable base, such as for exampleNa₂CO₃, K₂CO₃ or triethylamine, resulting in a compound of formula(I-Aa-d). Intermediates of formula (IX) can also react with anintermediate of formula (X-a) wherein P represents a suitable protectivegroup, such as for example —C(═O)—O—C(CH₃)₃, in the presence of asuitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitablesolvent, such as for example dimethylacetamide, resulting in anintermediate of formula (XXX) which can be deprotected to a compound offormula (I-Aa-b-1) in the presence of a suitable acid, such as forexample HCl or trifluoroacetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as forexample dichloromethane or an alcohol, e.g. methanol. Intermediates offormula (XXX) can also be prepared by reacting an intermediate offormula (VI) with an intermediate of formula W₆—C₁₋₆alkyl-NR¹⁰P whereinW₆ represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g.bromo and the like, or —O—S(═O)₂—CH₃, and P is as defined above, in thepresence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and asuitable solvent, e.g. N,N-dimethylformamide or N,N-dimethylacetamide.Alternatively compounds of formula (I-Aa-d) or (I-Aa-b-1) can also beprepared by reacting respectively an intermediate of formula (VI) withan intermediate of formula W₆—C₁₋₆alkyl-Ncycle or W₆—C₁₋₆alkyl-NHR¹⁰wherein W₆ is as defined above. Intermediates of formula (VI) can reactwith W₆—R^(3d) wherein W₆ represents a suitable leaving group, such asfor example halo, e.g. bromo and the like, or —O—S(═O)₂—CH₃ orp-toluenesulfonate, and R^(3d) represents optionally substitutedC₁₋₆alkyl, such as for example —CH₂—C₃H₅, in the presence of a suitablebase, such as for example sodium hydride, Cs₂CO₃ or potassium hydroxideand a suitable phase transfer agent, such as for exampletetrabutylammonium bromide or and a suitable solvent, such as forexample N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide,2-methyltetrahydrofuran, water or acetonitrile, resulting in a compoundof formula (I-Aa-c). W₆—R^(3d) can also be used in an appropriate saltform, e.g. a hydrochloric acid salt of W₆—R^(3d). In this way, compoundsof formula (I-Aa-c) wherein R³ represents —S(═O)₂—N(CH₃)₂ can also beprepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (VI) withdimethylsulfamoyl chloride, in the presence of a suitable base, such asfor example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampleN,N-dimethylformamide. This type of reaction can also be used to preparean intermediate wherein the R^(3d) moiety is protected by an appropriateprotective group, such as for example triphenylmethyl or—CH₂—O—CH₂—CH₂—Si(CH₃)₃, which can then be deprotected to a compound offormula (I-Aa-c) in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for exampleHCl or trifluoroacetic acid, in a suitable solvent, such as for exampledichloromethane or acetonitrile, or by reaction with a suitabledesilylating agent, such as for example tetrabutylammonium fluoride inthe presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.This type of reaction can also be used to prepare a compound of formula(I-Ba) (see hereinafter). Compounds of formula (I-Aa-c) wherein theC₁₋₆alkyl chain within the definition of R3d represents-CH2-(C0-5alkyl)can also be prepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (VI) withHC(═O)—R3d′ in the presence of sodium cyanoborohydride, and a suitablesolvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol, anddichloromethane.

Compounds of formula (I-Aa-c) wherein R^(3d) represents—CH₂—C(OH)(R′)(R″) wherein R′ represents optionally substitutedC₁₋₄alkyl and R″ represents hydrogen or optionally substitutedC₁₋₄alkyl, said compounds being represented by formula (I-Aa-c-1), canbe prepared by reacting the intermediate of formula (VI) with anintermediate of formula (XXII) in the presence of a suitable base, suchas for example sodium hydride, Cs₂CO₃, or potassium hydroxide, and asuitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide,N,N-dimethylacetamide, acetonitrile or water.

Intermediates of formula (IV) can also react with an intermediate offormula (XXIII) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as forexample palladium (II) acetate or tris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium(0), a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert-butoxide orCs₂CO₃, a suitable ligand, such as for example1,1′-[1,1′-binaphthalene]-2,2′-diylbis[1, 1-diphenylphosphine] or2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2′-(N,N-dimethyl-amino)biphenyl ordicyclohexyl(2′,6′-diisopropoxy-2-biphenylyl)phosphine, and a suitablesolvent, such as for example dioxane, resulting in a compound of formula(I-Aa-c). Intermediates of formula (XXIII) can also react in a formwherein the R^(3d) moiety is in protected form, e.g. protected with—C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl. The resulting product can then be deprotected, forinstance in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCl,and a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.

Compounds of formula (I-Aa-b) wherein R¹¹ is C₁₋₆alkyl substituted withamino, said compounds being represented by formula (I-Aa-b-2), can alsobe prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 1A.

In Scheme 1A, a compound of formula (I-Aa-b-1) is reacted withN-(haloC₁₋₆alkyl)-phtalimide in the presence of a suitable base, such asfor example potassium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as forexample acetonitrile, resulting in an intermediate of formula (XXXVI)which can be converted into a compound of formula (I-Aa-b-2) by reactionwith hydrazine in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as forexample an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.

Compounds of formula (I-Aa) wherein R³ represents optionally substitutedC₂₋₆alkynyl, said compounds being represented by formula (I-Aa-k), canbe prepared according to reaction Scheme 1B.

In Scheme 1B, an intermediate of formula (VI) is reacted with anintermediate of formula W₁₁—R^(3e) wherein R^(3e) represents optionallysubstituted C₂₋₆alkynyl and W₁₁ represents a suitable leaving group suchas for example halo, e.g. chloro, or —O—S(═O)₂—CH₃, in the presence of asuitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such asfor example N,N-dimethylformamide. The intermediate W₁₁—R^(3e) whereinW₁₁ represents —O—S(═O)₂—CH₃, can be prepared by reacting thecorresponding alcohol derivative with methanesulfonyl chloride in thepresence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine or4-dimethylaminopyridine, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampledichloromethane.

Compounds of formula (I-Aa-k), wherein R^(3e) represents C₂₋₆alkynylsubstituted with hydroxyl, said compounds being represented by formula(I-Aa-k-1), can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme1C.

In Scheme 1C, an intermediate of formula (VI) is reacted with anintermediate of formula (XXXVIII) in the presence of a suitable base,such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampleN,N-dimethylformamide, resulting in an intermediate of formula (VIII′),which is converted into a compound of formula (I-Aa-k-1) by reactionwith a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, in thepresence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.This reaction can also be performed with tetrabutyl ammonium fluoride inthe presence of a suitable solvent such as for example tetrqahydrofuran.

Alternatively, instead of an intermediate of formula (XXXVIII),halo-C₂₋₆alkynyl-O—Si(R^(x))(R^(y))(R^(z)) can also be used.

Compounds of formula (I-Aa-k), wherein R^(3e) represents C₂₋₆alkynyl,said compounds being represented by formula (I-Aa-k-2), can be preparedaccording to the following reaction Scheme 1D.

In Scheme 1 D, a compound of formula (I-Aa-k-2) is prepared bydeprotecting an intermediate of formula (XXXXII) in the presence of asuitable base, such as for example K₂CO₃, and a suitable solvent, suchas for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol and the like. Said intermediateof formula (XXXXII) can be prepared by reacting an intermediate offormula (VI) with W₁₃—C₂₋₆alkynyl-Si(CH₃)₃ wherein W₁₃ is a suitableleaving group, such as for example halogen, in the presence of asuitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitable solvent, such asfor example N,N-dimethylformamide.

Compounds of formula (I-Aa), wherein R³ represents ethyl substitutedwith —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂, said compounds being represented by formula(I-Aa-I), can be prepared according to the following reaction Scheme 1E.

In scheme 1E, an intermediate of formula (VI) is reacted withdi(C₁₋₆alkyl)vinylphosphonate in the presence of a suitable catalyst,such as for example tri-N-butylphosphine, and a suitable solvent, suchas for example acetonitrile resulting in a compound of formula (Ia-I).

Intermediates of formula (IV) can be prepared according to the followingreaction Scheme 2.

In Scheme 2, the following reaction conditions apply:

1: in the presence of a Meldrum's acid and triethyl orthoformate, and asuitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol;

2: in the presence of diphenyl ether or dowtherm A;

3: in the presence of N-bromo-succinimide, and acetic acid;

4: in the presence of phosphoryl chloride, and a suitable solvent, suchas for example chloroform;

5: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodiumcarbonate, a suitable catalyst, such as for example PdCl₂(pddf).CH₂Cl₂,and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane and water;

6: in the presence of catalyst, such as for example Raney nickel, andH₂, a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydroxide, and asuitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol, andtetrahydrofuran;

7: In the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCl, and asuitable solvent, such as for example, dioxane;

8: in the presence of a suitable leaving group introducing agent, suchas for example phosphoryl chloride, and a suitable solvent, such as forexample chloroform.

Some naphthyridines are described in R. Morgentin et al./Tetrahedron 64(2008) 2772e2782.

Compounds of formula (I-A) wherein X² is N and X¹ is CH; and Y is D (Eis a bond) can be prepared according to the reaction schemes describedabove starting from the corresponding intermediate (1,7-naphthyridineanalogue of intermediate of formula (IV)) which can be preparedaccording to the following reactions in Scheme 2A.

In Scheme 2A, the following reaction conditions apply:

1: in the presence of di-tert-butyl dicarbonate, and a suitable solvent,e.g. dioxane;

2: in the presence of N-methoxy-N-methylacetamide, and tetramethylenediamine used as a base in the presence of BuLi

3: in the presence of N,N-dimethylformamide and N,n-dimethylacetamide

4: in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for exampletrifluoroacetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampletoluene.

5: in the presence of N-bromosuccinimide, and a suitable acid, such asfor example acetic acid

6: in the presence of POCl3 and a suitable solvent, such as for exampleCHCl₃

7; in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodiumcarbonate, a suitable catalyst, such as for example PdCl₂(pddf).CH₂Cl₂,and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane and water;

8: in the presence of catalyst, such as for example Raney nickel, andH₂, a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydroxide, and asuitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol, andtetrahydrofuran;

9: in the presence of AlCl₃, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampledichloroethane

10: in the presence of a leaving group introducing agent, such as forexample SOCl₂ or N-phenyl-bis(trifluoromethanesulfonimide), optionally asuitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitablesolvent, such as for example toluene, dichloromethane andN,N-dimethylformamide.

Some of the intermediates are described in R. Morgentin etal./Tetrahedron 64 (2008) 2772e2782.

In general, compounds of formula (I-B) wherein R^(3a) is hydrogen and Yis D (E is a bond), said compounds being represented by formula (I-Ba),can be prepared according to the following reactions in Scheme 3.

In Scheme 3, an intermediate of formula (VI) can react with W₆—R^(3d)wherein W₆ represents a suitable leaving group, such as for examplehalo, e.g. bromo and the like, or —O—S(═O)₂—CH₃, in the presence of asuitable base, such as for example potassium hydroxide and a suitablephase transfer agent, such as for example tetrabutylammonium bromideand, and a suitable solvent, such as for example 2-methyltetrahydrofuranand water, resulting in a compound of formula (I-Ba).

Intermediates of formula (VIII-B) can react with tetrabutylammoniumfluoride, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for exampletetrahydrofuran, resulting in a compound of formula (I-Ba-a).

In general, compounds of formula (I-A) wherein X¹ is N, and X² isCR^(3a); Y is D (E is a bond), said compounds being represented byformula (I-Ab), can be prepared according to the following reactionScheme 4.

In Scheme 4, the following reaction conditions apply:

1; starting material is prepared according to the reactions described inscheme 2. Said starting material is reacted in the presence of asuitable acid, such as for example HCl, and a suitable solvent, such asfor example dioxane.

2; in the presence of POCl3, and a suitable solvent, such as for examplechloroform;

3: in the presence of intermediate (V) (see Scheme 1), a suitable base,such as for example diisopropylethylamine, and a suitable solvent, suchas for example an alcohol, e.g. 1-propanol;

4: according to the reactions described above.

Intermediates of formula (VIII-a) or (VIII-b) can be prepared accordingto the following reaction Scheme 4′.

In Scheme 4′, an intermediate of formula (XVII) is reacted with anintermediate of formula (VII) in the presence of a suitable base, suchas for example sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as forexample N,N-dimethylformamide, resulting in an intermediate of formula(XVIII). The intermediate of formula (XVIII) can then be reacted with anintermediate of formula (III) or (III-a) in the presence of a suitablecatalyst, such as for example Pd₂(dba)₃, a suitable base, such as forexample K₃PO₄, a suitable ligand, such as for example2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2′,6′-dimethoxy-biphenyl or S-Phos, and asuitable solvent, such as for example dioxane or water or mixturesthereof. Intermediates of formula (VIII-a) can be transformed in anintermediate of formula (VIII-b) in the presence of catalyst, such asfor example Raney nickel, and H₂, a suitable base, such as for examplesodium hydroxide, and a suitable solvent, such as for example analcohol, e.g. ethanol.

Intermediates of formula (VIII-a) or (VIII-b) can also be preparedaccording to the following reaction Scheme 4A.

In Scheme 4A, an intermediate of formula (XVIII) is reacted with anintermediate of formula (XXXVII) in the presence of a suitable catalyst,such as for example tetrakis(triphenylphisphine)palladium (0), and asuitable solvent, such as for example toluene.

Intermediates of formula (VIII-a) can be transformed in an intermediateof formula (VIII-b) in the presence of catalyst, such as for exampleRaney nickel, and H₂, a suitable base, such as for example sodiumhydroxide, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g.ethanol.

Intermediates of formula (XVII) can be prepared according to thefollowing reaction Schemes 5 and 6.

In Scheme 5: the following reaction conditions apply:

1: in the presence of a Meldrum's acid and triethyl orthoformate, and asuitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol;

2: in the presence of diphenyl ether;

3: in the presence of N-bromo-succinimide, and acetic acid;

4: in the presence of phosphoryl chloride, and a suitable solvent, suchas for example chloroform;

5: in the presence of a suitable aniline of formula (V) as definedhereinabove, in a suitable solvent, such as for example 1-propanol.

In Scheme 6, the following reaction conditions apply:

1: in the presence of di-tert-butyl dicarbonate, and a suitable solvent,e.g. dioxane;

2: in the presence of N-methoxy-N-methylacetamide, and tetramethylenediamine used as a base and in the presence of BuLi

3: in the presence of N,N-dimethylformamide and NNn-dimethylacetamide

4: in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for exampletrifluoroacetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampletoluene.

5: in the presence of N-bromosuccinimide, and a suitable acid, such asfor example acetic acid

6: in the presence of POCl₃ and a suitable solvent, such as for exampleCHCl₃

7; in the presence of a suitable aniline of formula (V) as definedhereinabove, and a suitable solvent, such as for example 1-propanol,resulting in an intermediate of formula (XVII-b)

Intermediates of formula (VIII) wherein D is a ring moiety containing anitrogen atom, can be further reacted according to the followingreaction Scheme 7, depicted for the 1,5-naphthyridine scaffold and forR^(3a) being hydrogen (intermediates of formula (VIII′-b). It isconsidered to be within the knowledge of the skilled man to adopt thesereactions to the other intermediates of formula (VIII) describedhereinabove.

In Scheme 7, the D′N moiety represents a -D moiety wherein the D ringmoiety contains a nitrogen atom. Intermediates of formula (VIII′-b)wherein D represents D′NH, can be converted into an intermediate offormula (VIII′-b-2) by reaction with W₁₂—C₁₋₆alkyl-halo wherein W₁₂represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g.chloro, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, anda suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide. Saidintermediates of formula (VIII′-b-1) can be converted into anintermediate of formula (VIII′-b-2) by reaction with R⁶ in the presenceof a suitable base, such as for example K₂CO₃, and a suitable solvent,such as for example acetonitrile. When in an intermediate of formula(VIII′-b-2) the R⁶ carries a hydroxyl group as in an intermediate offormula (VIII′-b-3), then said hydroxyl group can be protected by asuitable protective group P, such as for example —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, byreaction with C₁₋₆alkyl-C(═O)—W₁₂, in the presence of a suitable base,such as for example triethylamine, 4-dimethylaminopyridine, and asuitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, resulting in anintermediate of formula (VIII′-b-4) which can be converted into anintermediate of formula (XXXIX) by reaction with tetrabutylammoniumfluoride in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for exampletetrahydrofuran. Said intermediate of formula (XXXIX) can be convertedinto an intermediate of formula (XXXX) wherein R^(u) represents —SO₂CH₃,by reaction with methane sulfonyl chloride in the presence of a suitablebase, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such asfor example dichloromethane. In particular, this type of reaction isused to prepare intermediates of formula (XXXX) wherein C₁₋₆alkylrepresents C₃₋₆alkyl. For some variants of intermediates of formula(XXXX), e.g. wherein C₁₋₆alkyl represents C₁₋₂alkyl, it might bepreferred to perform the reaction in non basic conditions. Intermediatesof formula (XXXX) can be converted into an intermediate of formula(XXXXI) by reaction with an intermediate of formula (X) in a suitablesolvent, such as for example acetonitrile. Said intermediate of formula(XXXXI) can then be deprotected into a compound of formula (I-Aa-b-4) inthe presence of a suitable base, such as for example K₂CO₃, and asuitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol and thelike. It is considered to be within the knowledge of the person skilledin the art to recognize for which other D ring moieties the describedreactions also apply.

Intermediates of formula (VIII′-b) can also be reacted to preparecompounds of the present invention according to the reaction schemes aspresented in Scheme 1. It is considered to be within the knowledge ofthe skilled person to recognize in which condition and for whichdefinitions of R¹ on the D ring moiety a protective group may beappropriate for the reactions to be carried out. For instance, ahydroxyl group within the definition of R¹ may be protected with a tert.butyldimethylsilyl moiety; a NH group within the definition of R¹ may beprotected with a —C(═O)—O—C(CH₃)₃ group.

It is also considered to be within the knowledge of the skilled personto recognize appropriate deprotection reactions.

Compounds of formula (I-A) wherein R³ represents optionally substitutedC₁₋₆alkyl, said compounds being represented by formula (I-Aa-c), canalso be prepared according to the below reaction Scheme 8.

In Scheme 8, an intermediate of formula (XVII) is reacted with W₆—R^(3d)wherein W₆ represents a suitable leaving group, such as for examplehalo, e.g. bromo and the like, and R^(3d) represents optionallysubstituted C₁₋₆alkyl, such as for example —CH₂—C₃H₅, in the presence ofa suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitablesolvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide, resulting in anintermediate of formula (XIX). In a next step, the intermediate offormula (XIX) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (III) or(III-a) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for exampletetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium or Pd₂(dba)₃(tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium (0)), optionally a suitableligand, such as 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-2′,6′-dimethoxybiphenyl, asuitable base, such as for example Na₂CO₃ or K₃PO₄, and a suitablesolvent, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether or dioxane orwater. Or the intermediate of formula (XIX) is reacted with anintermediate of formula (XXXVII) in the presence of a suitable catalyst,such as for example tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium, and asuitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide or toluene.Or the intermediate of formula (XIX) is reacted with D-W, wherein Wrepresents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g.bromo, iodo and the like, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, suchas for example tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium, zinc chloride andethylmagnesium chloride to prepare organozincic reacting species, and asuitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. An intermediateof formula (XIX) can also react with a suitable ring moiety representedby D, e.g. imidazole or 4-methylimidazole or 3-methylpyrazole or2-methylimidazole, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as forexample tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium (0), a suitable ligand,such as for example Rac-bis (diphenylphosphino)-1,1′-binaphthyl, in thepresence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert-butoxide,and a suitable solvent, such as for example toluene to obtain thecorresponding final compound. Or an intermediate of formula (XIX) canreact with e.g. 4-(aminomethyl)piperidine, morpholine, 1,2,4-triazole,ethyl 4-methyl-5-imidazolecarboxylate, piperazine or a derivativethereof, e.g. 1-(2-hydroxyethyl)-piperazine or 1-methyl-piperazine, inthe presence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine orsodium hydride or cesium carbonate, in the presence of a suitablecatalyst, such as for example palladium (II) acetate, a suitable ligand,such as for example Rac-bis (diphenylphosphino)-1,1′-binaphthyl and asuitable solvent, such as for example, tetrahydrofuran,N,N-dimethylformamide, or an alcohol, e.g. 1-butanol, to obtain thecorresponding final compound.

An intermediate of formula (XIX) can also react with1-(triisopropylsilyl)pyrrole-3-boronic acid, in the presence of asuitable catalyst, such as for example tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphinepalladium, a suitable base, such as for example sodium carbonate andtetrabutylammonium fluoride, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampleethylene glycol dimethylether, to obtain a compound of formula(I-Aa-c-2). An intermediate of formula (XIX) can react with zinc cyanidein the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for exampletetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium, a suitable ligand, such as forexample triphenylphosphine, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampleacetonitrile. The resulting intermediate of formula (IXL) can react withsodium azide and ammonium chloride in the presence of a suitablesolvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide, to obtain a compoundof formula (I-Aa-c-3).

Compounds of formula (I-Aa-c), (I-Aa-c-2) or compounds of formula(I-Aa-c-3) can be transformed in the corresponding compounds whereinR^(3a) is hydrogen, in the presence of catalyst, such as for exampleRaney nickel, and H₂, a suitable base, such as for example sodiumhydroxide, and a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g.ethanol

Compounds of formula (I-Aa-c) can alternatively also be preparedaccording to the below reaction Scheme 9.

In Scheme 9, an intermediate of formula (IV) is reacted with R^(3d)—NH₂in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium(II) acetate or Pd₂dba₃, a suitable base, such as for example sodiumtert-butoxide, and a suitable ligand, such as for example1,1′-[1,1′-binaphthalene]-2,2′-diylbis[1,1-diphenylphosphine] orxantphos, resulting in an intermediate of formula (XX). This type ofreaction can also be performed with R^(3d)—NH₂ in the presence of asuitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. n-propanol. Anintermediate of formula (IV) can also react with R^(3d)—NH₂ in thepresence of a suitable deprotonating agent such as for example potassiumbis(trimethylsilyl)amide. In a suitable solvent such as for exampletetrahydrofuran. Intermediates of formula (XX) are reacted in a nextstep with an intermediate of formula (XIV) in the presence of a suitablecatalyst, such as for example palladium (II) acetate or Pd₂(dba)₃(tris(dibenzylidene acetone) dipalladium (0)), a suitable ligand such asfor example 2-dicyclohexylphosphino-tris-isopropyl-biphenyl or1,1′-[1,1′-binaphthalene]-2,2′-diylbis[1,1-diphenylphosphine], asuitable base, such as for example sodium tert-butoxide, and a suitablesolvent, such as for example ethylene glycol dimethylether.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents optionally substitutedC₁₋₆alkyl, and wherein Y is E-D and E is other than a bond, saidcompounds being represented by formula (I-Ab) can be prepared accordingto the below reaction Scheme 10.

In Scheme 10, an intermediate of formula (XIX) prepared according to themethods described above, is reacted with D-NHR²² in the presence of asuitable catalyst, such as for example Pd₂(dba)₃(tris(dibenzylideneacetone) dipalladium (0)), a suitable ligand, such asfor example 9,9-dimethyl-4,5-bis(diphenylphosphino)xanthenes, a suitablebase, such as for example cesium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, suchas for example dioxane, resulting in a compound of formula (I-Ab-1). Oran intermediate of formula (XIX) is reacted with

in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for exampledichlorobis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (II) and copperiodide, asuitable ligand, such as for example triphenylphosphine, a suitablebase, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such asfor example N,N-dimethylformamide to obtain a compound of formula(I-Ab-2). A compound of formula (I-Ab-2) can also be prepared byreacting an intermediate of formula (XLI) with D-W as defined above, inthe presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for exampledichlorobis(triphenylphosphine) palladium (II) and copperiodide, asuitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and a suitablesolvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide and acetonitrile. Theintermediate of formula (XLI) can be prepared by reacting anintermediate of (XIX) with (trimethylsilyl)acetylene in the presence ofa suitable catalyst, such as for example dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II) and copperiodide, a suitable ligand, such as for exampletriphenylphosphine, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine,and a suitable solvent, such as for example dimethylsulfoxide, followedby reacting the resulting intermediate of formula (XL) with potassiumcarbonate in a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g.methanol. The intermediate of formula (XLI) can also react with2-(4-morpholino)-ethylazide, in the presence of a suitable catalyst,such as for example copper iodide, a suitable base, such as for exampleN,N-diisopropylethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampletetrahydrofuran, to obtain a compound wherein E is a bond and D is2-(4-morpholino)ethyl-1-triazolyl. An intermediate of formula (XLI) canalso react with sodium azide and formaldehyde in the presence of asuitable catalyst, such as for example copper sulfate and sodium Lascorbate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane andacetic acid, to obtain a compound of formula (IAa-c-5). Compounds offormula (I-Ab-1), (I-Ab-2) and (I-Aa-5) can be transformed incorresponding compounds wherein R^(3a) is hydrogen, in the presence ofcatalyst, such as for example Raney nickel, and H₂, a suitable base,such as for example sodium hydroxide, and a suitable solvent, such asfor example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol

Compounds of formula (I-Ab) can also be prepared according to the belowreaction Scheme 10A.

In Scheme 10A, an intermediate of formula (XIX) is reacted with CO gaz,potassium acetate, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as forexample tetrakis(triphenyl)phosphine palladium, and a suitable solvent,such as for example dioxane resulting in an intermediate of formula(XLII) which can be transformed in an intermediate of formula (XLII′) inthe presence of catalyst, such as for example Raney nickel, and H₂, asuitable base, such as for example sodium hydroxide, and a suitablesolvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol. The intermediateof formula (XLII′) is reacted with D-(CR²²R²³)_(s)—NHR²² in the presenceof suitable peptide coupling reagents such as for example1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride and1-hydroxybenzotriazole, a suitable base, such as for exampletriethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example methylenechloride, to obtain a compound of formula (I-Ab-3). The intermediate offormula (XLII′) can also react with D-H in the presence of suitablepeptide coupling reagents such as for example1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride and1-hydroxy-benzotriazole, a suitable base, such as for exampletriethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example methylenechloride to obtain a compound of formula (I-Ab-4). An intermediate offormula (XIX) can also react with 1,1-diphenylmethylenimine in thepresence of a suitable catalyst such astris(dibenzylideneacetone)dipalladium, in the presence of a suitableligand such as for example9,9-dimethyl-4,5-bis(diphenyl-phosphino)xanthenes, in the presence of asuitable base, such as for example sodium tert-butylate and in thepresence of a suitable solvent, such as for example ethylene glycoldimethylether to obtain an intermediate of formula (XLIII-a). Saidintermediate can be converted into an amine of formula (XLIII) byhydrolysis in an acidic medium, which can react with D-COOH, in thepresence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as for example1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride and1-hydroxybenzotriazole, a suitable base, such as for exampletriethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example methylenechloride to obtain a compound of formula (I-Ab-5). Said compound can betransformed in a compound of formula (I-Ab-5) in the presence ofcatalyst, such as for example Raney nickel, and H₂, and a suitablesolvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol Alternatively, theamine of formula (XLIII) can first be concerted into an intermediate offormula (XLIII′) according to the method described for (I-Ab-5′) andthen react with D-COOH to a compound of formula (I-Ab-5′)

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ is C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with5-amino-1,3,4-oxadiazolyl can be prepared according to the belowreaction Scheme 11.

In Scheme 11, a compound of formula (I-Ac-1) is reacted with NH₂—NH₂ inthe presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g.ethanol resulting in an intermediate of formula (XXXI) which is thenreacted in a next step with W₈—CN, wherein W₈ represents a suitableleaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo, in the presence ofa suitable base, such as for example NaHCO₃, and a suitable solvent,such as for example water or dioxane.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ is C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with3,3-dimethyl-morpholine can be prepared according to the below reactionScheme 11A

In Scheme 11A, a compound of formula (I-Ac-3) is reacted with2-amino-2-methyl-1-propanol in the presence of a suitable base, such asfor example NaH and in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as forexample N,N-dimethylformamide resulting in an intermediate of formula(XXXII) of which the NH₂ moiety is protected by a suitable protectinggroup P, such as for example —C(═O)—O—C(CH₃)₃, by reaction with forinstance di-tert-butyl dicarbonate in the presence of a suitablesolvent, such as for example dioxane, and a suitable base, such as forexample NaHCO₃, resulting in an intermediate of formula (XXXIII). In anext step, said intermediate is reacted with methanesulfonyl chloride inthe presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane,and a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine resulting in anintermediate of formula (XXXIV). In particular, this type of reaction isused to prepare intermediates of formula (XXXIV) wherein C₁₋₆alkylrepresents C₃₋₆alkyl. For some variants of intermediates of formula(XXXIV), e.g. wherein C₁₋₆alkyl represents C₁₋₂alkyl it might bepreferred to perform the reaction in non basic conditions. Intermediatesof formula (XXXIV) are converted into an intermediate of formula (XXXV)by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroaceticacid, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for exampledichloromethane. The intermediate of formula (XXXV) is converted into acompound of formula (I-Ac-4) by reaction with a suitable base, such asfor example N,N-diisopropylethylamine and triethylamine in the presenceof a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol.

In general, compounds of formula (I) wherein Y represents —CCH₃═N—OR¹⁹,said compounds being represented by formula (I-Ad), can be prepared asin Scheme 12.

In Scheme 12, the following reaction conditions apply:

1; reaction with tributyl(1-ethoxyvinyl)tin, in the presence of asuitable catalyst, such as for example dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium (II) and copper iodide, a suitable ligand, such as for exampletriphenylphosphine, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampleN,N-dimethylformamide2: in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example hydrochloricacid, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetone. The containedintermediate can also be converted into a compound of formula (I-Aa)wherein E is a direct bond and D is 3-methyl-oxazole or oxazole, byreaction with 1-methyl-1-tosylmethyl isocyanide or tosylmethylisocyanide, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for exampledipotassium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example analcohol, e.g. methanol.3: reaction with ethylene glycol in the presence of an acid to obtain anketal such as CPD.4: in the presence of catalyst, such as for example Raney nickel, andH₂, in a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.5: ketal protection can be removed by reaction with an acid such as forexample acetic acid in a solvent such as dichloromethane ortetrahydrofuran.6: reaction with R¹⁹—O—NH₂ in the presence of a suitable base such asfor example pyridine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example analcohol, e.g. ethanol.

As already shown above, the present compounds or some of theabove-described intermediates can be prepared by deprotecting thecorresponding protected compounds. Other protection-deprotectionreactions are shown in the following reaction Scheme 13.

In Scheme 13, the Y′N moiety represents an -E-D moiety wherein the Dring moiety contains a nitrogen atom. Compounds of formula (I-A) whereinR¹ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl can be prepared by deprotecting anintermediate of formula (XXVI) in the presence of a suitable acid, suchas for example HCl or trifluoroacetic acid, or a suitable de-silylatingagent, such as for example tetrabutyl ammonium fluoride, and a suitablesolvent, such as an alcohol, e.g. methanol, or tetrahydrofuran (step 2).Intermediates of formula (XXVI) can be prepared by reacting a compoundof formula (I-A) wherein R¹ is hydrogen with an intermediate of formula(XXIV) wherein W₉ represents a suitable leaving group, such as forexample halo, e.g. bromo and the like, and P represents a suitableprotective group, such as for example —Si(CH₃)₂(C(CH₃)₃) or

in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydrideor K₂CO₃, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampleN,N-dimethylformamide or acetonitrile (step 1).

Compounds of formula (I-A) wherein R¹ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —C(═O)—R⁶ wherein R⁶ is an appropriate nitrogen containing ringlinked to the C(═O) moiety via the nitrogen atom can be prepared byreacting an intermediate of formula (XXIX) with an intermediate offormula (XXI) in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents suchas, 1-hydroxy-benzotriazole and 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide HCl (step 5). Intermediates of formula (XXIX) can beprepared by reacting an intermediate of formula (XXVIII) with LiOH inthe presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuranor water (step 4). Intermediates of formula (XXVIII) can be prepared byas depicted in step 3 with an intermediate of formula (XXVII) wherein W₉is as defined above, in the presence of a suitable base, such as forexample sodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampleN,N-dimethylformamide.

Step 6 depicts the preparation of compounds of formula (I-A) startingfrom an intermediate of formula (XXIX) by reaction with NHR⁴R⁵ in thepresence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as1-hydroxy-benzotriazole and 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide HCl and a suitable base, such as triethylamine, and asuitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.

Further protection-deprotection reactions can also be used as outlinedin the following reaction Scheme 14.

In Scheme 14, the following reaction conditions apply:

1; in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodiumhydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampleN,N-dimethylformamide.

2: in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium(II)acetate, a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert-butoxide,a suitable ligand, such as for example1,1′-[1,1′-binaphthalene]-2,2′-diylbis[1,1-diphenylphosphine], and asuitable solvent, such as for example dioxane or ethylene glycoldimethylether. Alternatively, this type of reaction can also beperformed in the presence of a suitable deprotonating agent, such as forexample potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide, in a suitable solvent, suchas for example tetrahydrofuran. Or, alternatively this type of reactioncan also be performed in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as forexample an alcohol, e.g. n-propanol.3: in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for example palladium(II)acetate, a suitable base, such as for example sodium tert-butoxide,a suitable ligand, such as for example1,1′-[1,1′-binaphthalene]-2,2′-diylbis[1,1-diphenylphosphine], and asuitable solvent, such as for example dioxane or ethylene glycoldimethylether.4: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for exampletriethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampledichloromethane.5: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K₂CO₃, and asuitable solvent, such as for example 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone.6: in the presence of hydrazine monohydrate, and a suitable solvent,such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.7: in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K₂CO₃, and asuitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.

It is to be considered to be within the knowledge of the person skilledin the art to recognize which of the reactions described above forcompounds of (I-A) are also applicable for compounds of formula (I-B).

It is considered to be within the knowledge of the person skilled in theart to recognize in which condition and on which part of the molecule aprotective group may be appropriate. For instance, protective group onthe R¹ substituent or on the D moiety, or protective group on the R³substituent or on the R² substituent or combinations thereof. Theskilled person is also considered to be able to recognize the mostfeasible protective group, such as for example —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₄alkyl or

or —O—Si(CH₃)₂(C(CH₃)₃) or —CH₂—O—CH₂CH₂—O—CH₃ or—CH₂—O—CH₂—CH₂—Si(CH₃)₃. The skilled person is also considered to beable to recognize the most feasible deprotection reaction conditions,such as for example suitable acids, e.g. trifluoroacetic acid,hydrochloric acid, or suitable salts, such as for exampletetrabutylammonium fluoride. Reference herefore is also made to theexamples described in the Experimental Part hereinafter.

The skilled person is also considered to be able to recognize that whenR¹ represents C(═O)-morpholinyl, said R¹ can be prepared from—C(═O)—NH—CH₂—CH₂—O—CH₂—CH₂—O—SO₂-4-methylphenyl, in the presence ofsodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampleN,N-dimethylformamide. Or that when R¹ represents —NH—C(═O)-morpholinyl,said R¹ can be prepared from —NH—C(═O)—O—C(CH₃)₃ in the presence ofmorpholine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone. Or that when R¹ represents hydroxylC₁₋₆alkyl,e.g. —CH₂—CH₂—OH, said R¹ can be prepared from the correspondingalkoxycarbonyl intermediate, e.g. —CH₂—C(═O)—O—CH₂—CH₃, in the presenceof Dibal-H 1M in hexane, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampletetrahydrofuran.

The present invention also comprises deuterated compounds. Thesedeuterated compounds may be prepared by using the appropriate deuteratedintermediates during the synthesis process. For instance an intermediateof formula (IV-a)

can be converted into an intermediate of formula (IV-b)

by reaction with iodomethane-D3 in the presence of a suitable base, suchas for example cesium carbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as forexample acetonitrile.

The compounds of formula (I) may also be converted into each other viaart-known reactions or functional group transformations.

For instance, compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ representstetrahydropyranyl can be converted into a compound of formula (I)wherein R¹ represents hydrogen, by reaction with a suitable acid, suchas for example HCl or trifluoroacetic acid, in the presence of asuitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane, dioxane, or analcohol, e.g. methanol, isopropanol and the like.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represent monohaloalkyl, canbe converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ representC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with a ring moiety as defined hereinabove by theintermediate of formula (XXI) and linked to the C₁₋₆alkyl moiety by thenitrogen atom, by reaction with an intermediate of formula (XXI)optionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as for exampletriethylamine or K₂CO₃ or sodium hydride, and optionally in the presenceof a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile,N,N-dimethylformamide or 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone. For the R³ moiety,this type of reaction is in particular used to prepare compounds whereinC₁₋₆alkyl represents C₃₋₆alkyl. For some variants of the compounds, e.g.wherein C₁₋₆alkyl represents C₁₋₂alkyl, it might be preferred to performthe reaction in non basic conditions.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl-OH, canbe converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ representC₁₋₆alkyl-F by reaction with diethylaminosulfur trifluoride in thepresence of a suitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane andin the presence of catalytic amounts of an alcohol, such as for exampleethanol. Likewise, a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ representC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶ or R⁹ wherein said R⁶ or R⁹ is substitutedwith OH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ orR³ represent C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶ or R⁹ wherein said R⁶ or R⁹is substituted with F, by reaction with diethylaminosulfur trifluoridein the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for exampledichloromethane.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represent C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with R⁶ or R⁹ wherein said R⁶ or R⁹ is substituted with—C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I)wherein R¹ or R³ represent C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶ or R⁹ whereinsaid R⁶ or R⁹ is substituted with —CH₂—OH, by reaction with LiAlH₄ inthe presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith 1,3-dioxo-2H-isoindol-2-yl, can be converted into a compound offormula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with amino, byreaction with hydrazine monohydrate in the presence of a suitablesolvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol. Compounds offormula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represent C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with amino,can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, by reactionwith Cl—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl in the presence of a suitable base, such as forexample triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampledichloromethane.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represents C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with halo, can be converted into a compound of formula (I)wherein R¹ or R³ represent C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with NR⁴R⁵ or NR¹⁰R¹¹,by reaction with NHR⁴R⁵ or NHR¹⁰R¹¹, either using such amino in largeexcess or in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K₂CO₃,and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile,N,N-dimethylacetamide or 1-methyl-pyrrolidinone. For the R³ moiety, thistype of reaction is in particular used to prepare compounds whereinC₁₋₆alkyl represents C₃₋₆alkyl. For some variants of the compounds, e.g.wherein C₁₋₆alkyl represents C₁₋₂alkyl, it might be preferred to performthe reaction in non basic conditions.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents hydrogen, can beconverted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ representspolyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl or polyhydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl or C₁₋₆alkyl or—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵ or —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, by reaction withpolyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl-W or polyhydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl-W or C₁₋₆alkyl-W orW—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵ or W—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, wherein W represents a suitableleaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo, iodo and the like,in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydrideor K₂CO₃ or triethylamine or 4-dimethylamino-pyridine ordiisopropylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampleN,N-dimethylformamide or acetonitrile or dichloromethane.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents hydrogen can also beconverted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ representsC₁₋₆alkyl-OH, by reaction with W—C₁₋₆alkyl-O—Si(CH₃)₂(C(CH₃)₃) in thepresence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride, and asuitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide and, thenfollowed by a reaction with a suitable desilylating agent such astetrabutyl ammonium fluoride.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents hydrogen, can also beconverted into compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents ethylsubstituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, by reaction withC₁₋₆alkyl-vinylsulfone, in the presence of a suitable base, such as forexample triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example analcohol, e.g. methanol or by reaction with C₁₋₆alkyl-2-bromoethylsulfonein the presence of a suitable deprotonating agent, such as for exampleNaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for example dimethyformamide.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents hydrogen can also beconverted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents—CH₂—CHOH—CH₂

by reaction with

in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example sodium hydride,and a suitable solvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide,wherein

represents a suitable nitrogen containing ring within the definition ofR⁶. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith R⁶ wherein said R⁶ is substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl or—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵ or wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹wherein said R⁹ is substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl or—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) whereinthe R⁶ or R⁹ is unsubstituted, by reaction with a suitable acid, such asfor example HCl and a suitable solvent, such as for example dioxane,acetonitrile or an alcohol, e.g. isopropylalcohol. Compounds of formula(I) wherein R¹ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶ wherein said R⁶is a ring moiety comprising a nitrogen atom which is substituted with—CH₂—OH or wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹ whereinsaid R⁹ is a ring moiety comprising a nitrogen atom which is substitutedwith —CH₂—OH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) whereinthe R⁶ or R⁹ is unsubstituted, by reaction with sodium hydroxide, in thepresence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith R⁶ or R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, wherein said R⁶or said R⁹ is unsubstituted, can be converted into a compound of formula(I) wherein said R⁶ or said R⁹ is substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl, byreaction with W—C₁₋₆alkyl wherein W is as defined above, in the presenceof a suitable base. Such as for example sodium hydride, and a suitablesolvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ or R³ represent hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl,can be converted into the corresponding carbonyl compound, by reactionwith dess-Martin-periodinane, in the presence of a suitable solvent,such as for example dichloromethane.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith R⁶ or R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, wherein said R⁶or said R⁹ is substituted with C₁₋₆alkyl-halo, can be converted into acompound of formula (I) wherein said R⁶ or said R⁹ is substituted withC₁₋₆alkyl-CN, by reaction with sodium cyanide, in the presence of asuitable solvent, such as for example water or an alcohol, e.g. ethanol.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith R⁶ wherein said R⁶ is unsubstituted or wherein R³ representsC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹ wherein said R⁹ is unsubstituted, can beconverted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R⁶ or R⁹ is substitutedwith —CH₃ or —CH(CH₃)₂, by reaction with formaldehyde or acetone andNaBH₃CN, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for exampletetrahydrofuran or an alcohol, e.g. methanol.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ contains a R⁶ substituentsubstituted with OH or wherein R³ contains a R⁹ substituent substitutedwith OH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein the R⁶or R⁹ substituent is substituted with C₁₋₆alkyloxy, by reaction withW—C₁₋₆alkyl, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for examplesodium hydride, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampleN,N-dimethylformamide. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ contains a R⁶substituent substituted with C₁₋₆alkyloxy or wherein R³ contains a R⁹substituent substituted with C₁₋₆alkyloxy, can be converted into acompound of formula (I) wherein the R⁶ or R⁹ substituent is substitutedwith —OH by reaction with a suitable acid, such as for examplehydrochloric acid. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ contains a R⁶substituent substituted with halo or wherein R³ contains a R⁹substituent substituted with halo can be converted into a compound offormula (I) wherein the R⁶ or R⁹ substituent is substituted with—NR¹⁴R¹⁵ by reaction with NHR¹⁴R¹⁵ in a suitable solvent, such as forexample 1-methyl-pyrrolidinone. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, can beconverted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with COOH, by reaction with LiOH in the presence of asuitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. Said compounds offormula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with COOH, canbe converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ representsC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NH₂ or —C(═O)—NHCH₃ or —C(═O)NR¹⁰R¹¹,by reaction with NH(Si(CH₃)₃)₂ or MeNH₃ ⁺Cl⁻ or NHR¹⁰R¹¹ in the presenceof suitable peptide coupling reagents such as for example1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide HCl and1-hydroxybenzotriazole, a suitable base, such as for exampletriethylamine and a suitable solvent such as for example dichloromethaneor N,N-dimethylformamide. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ representsC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, can also be convertedinto a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with 4,5-dihydro-imidazol-2-yl, by reaction under N₂ withethylenediamine and trimethylaluminium in the presence of a suitablesolvent, such as for example toluene and heptane. This compound offormula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with4,5-dihydro-imidazol-2-yl, can be converted into a compound of formula(I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—NH—(CH₂)₂—NH₂ by reaction with sodium hydroxide. Compounds offormula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with COOH, canalso be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ representsC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—N(CH₃)(OCH₃) by reaction withdimethylhydroxylamine, in the presence of carbonyldiimidazole and asuitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith

can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ representsC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with 2 OH's, by reaction with a suitable acid,such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, and a suitable solvent, suchas for example dioxane or water. These compounds of formula (I) whereinR³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with

can also be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with OH and NR¹⁰R¹¹, by reaction withNH₂R¹⁰R¹¹ optionally in salt form, such as for example NHR¹⁰R¹¹⁺Cl⁻,optionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as for examplesodium hydride or Na₂CO₃ or triethylamine, a suitable additive such asfor example KI, and in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as forexample N,N-dimethylformamide or an alcohol, e.g. 1-butanol or ethanol.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₃alkyl substitutedwith —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I)wherein R³ represents C₁₋₃ alkyl substituted with —C(CH3)₂—OH, byreaction with iodomethane and Mg powder, in the presence of a suitablesolvent, such as for example diethylether or tetrahydrofuran. Compoundsof formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₅alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I)wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —OH, by reaction withLiAlH₄ in a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₅alkyl substitutedwith —OH, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³represents C₁₋₅alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl by reactionwith Cl—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl in the presence of a suitable base, such as forexample NaH, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampletetrahydrofuran.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents —CH₂—CH═CH₂, can beconverted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents—CH₂—CHOH—CH₂—OH, by reaction with potassium permanganate, and asuitable solvent, such as for example acetone or water. Compounds offormula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—C₁₋₄alkyl, can be converted into a compound of formula (I)wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(C₁₋₄alkyl)═N—OH, byreaction with hydroxylamine, in the presence of a suitable base, such asfor example pyridine, and a suitable solvent, such as for example analcohol, e.g. ethanol.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith NH₂, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—C(═O)—R⁶ or with—NH—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl or with —NH—C(═O)-polyhydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl or with—NH—C(═O)-polyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl or with—NH—C(═O)-polyhydroxypolyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, by reaction with thecorresponding COOH analogue, e.g. R⁶—COOH or CF₃—C(CH₃)(OH)—COOH and thelike, in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as1-hydroxy-benzotriazole and 1-(3-dimethylamino)propyl)carbodiimideoptionally in the presence of a suitable base, such as for exampletriethylamine. Said compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ representsC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with NH₂, can also be converted into a compound offormula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted withNH—C(═O)—CF₃, by reaction with trifluoroacetic anhydride, in thepresence of a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and asuitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran. Said compounds offormula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with NH₂, canalso be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ representsC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH-polyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, e.g. —NH—CH₂—CH₂—F, byreaction with polyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl-W, with W as defined above, e.g.iodo-2-fluoroethane, in the presence of a suitable base, such as forexample K₂CO₃, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampleN,N-dimethylformamide or dioxane. Said compounds of formula (I) whereinR³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with NH₂ can also be converted intoa compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —NH—R⁶ or —N(R⁶)₂ wherein R⁶ represents for example oxetane, byreaction with the appropriate R⁶ in the presence of a suitable reducingagent, such as for example sodium triacetoxyborohydride, a suitableacid, such as for example acetic acid, and a suitable solvent, such asfor example 1,2-dichloroethane.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith cyano, can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with tetrazolyl by reaction with sodiumazide, and NH₄ ⁺Cl⁻ in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as forexample N,N-dimethylformamide.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents —CH2-C≡CH, can beconverted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ represents

by reaction with ethyl azidoacetate in the presence of CuI and asuitable base, such as for example diisopropylamine, and a suitablesolvent, such as for example tetraydrofuran. Compounds of formula (I)wherein R³ represents —CH2-C≡CH, can be converted into a compound offormula (I) wherein R³ represents

by reaction with sodium azide and formaldehyde, in the presence of asuitable catalyst, such as for example CuSO₄ and sodium L ascorbate, asuitable acid, such as for example acetic acid, and a suitable solvent,such as for example dioxane.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represent C₂₋₆alkynyl, can beconverted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ representsC₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, by reaction with W—R⁹ wherein W is asdefined above, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as forexample dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium, a suitable co-catalystsuch as CuI, a suitable base, such as for example triethylamine, and asuitable solvent, such as for example dimethylsulfoxide.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ comprises R⁹ substituted with halo,can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ comprises R⁹substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵ by reaction with NHR¹⁴R¹⁵ in the presence of asuitable solvent, such as for example 1-methyl-2-pyrrolidinone.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ comprises C₂₋₆alkynyl, can behydrogenated into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ comprisesC₂₋₆alkyl in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for examplepalladium on charcoal, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampleethylacetate.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ comprises C₂₋₆alkynyl, can behydrogenated into a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ comprisesC₂₋₆alkenyl in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for exampleLindlar catalyst, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampleethylacetate.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂ can be converted into a compound of formula (I)wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OH)₂ by reactionwith bromotrimethylsilane in the presence of a suitable solvent, such asfor example dichloromethane. Compounds of formula (I) wherein the R⁹substituent is substituted with ═O, can be converted into thecorresponding reduced R⁹ substituent by reaction with a suitablereducing agent, such as for example LiAlH₄ in a suitable solvent, suchas for example tetrahydrofuran.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —C(═O)—R⁹ can be converted into a compound of formula (I) whereinR³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R⁹ by reactionwith a suitable reducing agent, such as for example sodium borohydride,in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol,e.g. methanol.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ comprises —NHR¹⁰ can be convertedinto a compound of formula (I) wherein R³ comprises—NR¹⁰—(C═O)-optionally substituted C₁₋₆alkyl, by reaction with thecorresponding W—(C═O)-optionally substituted C₁₋₆alkyl wherein Wrepresents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g.chloro and the like, in the presence of a suitable base, such as forexample triethylamine, and a suitable solvent, such as for exampleacetonitrile.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith NR¹⁰(benzyl) can be converted into a compound of formula (I)wherein R³ represents C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with NHR¹⁰, by reaction with1-chloroethylchloroformate in the presence of a suitable solvent, suchas for example dichloromethane.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents unsubstituted piperidine,can be converted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R¹ represents1-methyl-piperidine, by reaction with iodomethane in the presence of asuitable base, such as for example potassium carbonate, and a suitablesolvent, such as for example acetonitrile. Compounds of formula (I)wherein R¹ represents hydrogen can be converted into a compound offormula (I) wherein R¹ represents optionally substituted C₁₋₆alkyl, byreaction with optionally substituted C₁₋₆alkyl-W wherein W represents asuitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g. bromo and thelike, in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example potassiumcarbonate, and a suitable solvent, such as for example acetonitrile.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R² represents halo, e.g. bromo, can beconverted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R² represents cyano, byreaction with zinc cyanide, in the presence of a suitable catalyst, suchas for example Pd₂(dba)₃ and a suitable ligand, such as for example1,1-bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene, in the presence of a suitablesolvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.

Said R² substituent being cyano can be converted into —CH₂—NH₂ byhydrogenation in the presence of NH₃ and Nickel.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R² represents —OCH₃ can be convertedinto a compounds of formula (I) wherein R² represents —OH by reactionwith boron tribromide in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as forexample dichloromethane. Compounds of formula (I) wherein R² represents—OH can be converted into a compounds of formula (I) wherein R²represents —OCH₃ by reaction with methyl iodine in the presence of asuitable base, such as for example potassium carbonate, and a suitablesolvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide.

Compounds of formula (I) wherein R² represents hydrogen, can beconverted into a compound of formula (I) wherein R² represents —CHOH—CF₃by reaction with trifluoroacetaldehyde methyl hemiketal.

For the conversion reactions, reference is also made to the examplesdescribed in the Experimental Part hereinafter.

A further aspect of the invention is a process for the preparation of acompound of formula (I) as defined herein, which process comprises:

(i) deprotecting a compound of formula (XXX) wherein P represents asuitable protective group, such as for example a butyloxycarbonyl-group(—CO₂C(CH₃)₃) in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for exampleHCl or trifluoroacetic acid;

or(ii) the reaction of a compound of the formula (IX) or (IX′):

-   -   (IX): R^(u) is —O—(S═O)₂—CH₃        -   (IX′): R^(u) is Cl            or a protected form thereof, with an appropriately            substituted amine or a reactive derivative thereof, such as            for example NHR¹⁰R¹¹ (X), NHR¹⁰P (X-a) or H—N (XXI), for            example in a sealed vessel, in the presence of a suitable            base, such as for example sodium hydride and/or in the            presence or absence of a solvent such as acetonitrile,            N,N-dimethylformamide or N,N-dimethylacetamide; or            (iii) the reaction of a compound of the formula (VI):

or a protected form thereof, with a compound of formulaW₆—C₁₋₆alkyl-NR¹⁰P wherein P represents a suitable protective group andW₆ represents a suitable leaving group, such as for example halo, e.g.bromo and the like, or —O—S(═O)₂—CH₃, in the presence of a suitablebase, such as for example sodium hydride or potassium hydroxide, andoptionally in the presence of a suitable phase transfer agent, such asfor example tetrabutylammonium bromide, and a suitable solvent, e.g.N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, 2-methyltetrahydrofuran,water, followed by removing P and optionally removing any furtherprotecting group present; or(iv) the reaction of a compound of the formula (VI):

or a protected thereof, with a compound of formula W₆—C₁₋₆alkyl-NHR¹⁰wherein We represents a suitable leaving group, such as for examplehalo, e.g. bromo and the like, or —O—S(═O)₂—CH₃, in the presence of asuitable base, such as for example sodium hydride or potassiumhydroxide, and, optionally, a suitable phase transfer agent, such as forexample tetrabutylammonium bromide, and a suitable solvent, e.g.N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide or 2-methyltetrahydrofuran,water;(v) the reaction of a compound of formula (XXXVI)

with hydrazine in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as forexample an alcohol, e.g. ethanol;(vi) the reaction of a compound of formula (IX-1) wherein R^(u)represents —O—S(═O)₂—CH₃,

with an intermediate of formula (X) in the presence of a suitablesolvent, such as for example acetonitrile;(vii) the reaction of a compound of formula (VI)

with an intermediate of formula W₁₁—R^(3b) wherein R^(3b) representsoptionally substituted C₂₋₆alkynyl and W₁₁ represents a suitable leavinggroup such as for example halo, e.g. chloro, or —O—S(═O)₂—CH₃, in thepresence of a suitable base, such as for example NaH, and a suitablesolvent, such as for example N,N-dimethylformamide;(viii) the reaction of a compound of formula (VIII′) wherein R^(x) andR^(y) represent C₁₋₄alkyl, and R^(z) represent C₁₋₄alkyl or phenyl,

with a suitable acid, such as for example trifluoroacetic acid, in thepresence of a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran;(ix) deprotecting a compound of formula (XXXXII)

in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K₂CO₃, and asuitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol and thelike;(x) the reaction of a compound of formula (VI)

with di(C₁₋₆alkyl)vinylphosphonate in the presence of a suitablecatalyst, such as for example tri-N-butylphosphine, and a suitablesolvent, such as for example acetonitrile;(xi) deprotecting a compound of formula (XXXXI) wherein the D′N moietyrepresents a D moiety wherein the D moiety contains a nitrogen atom

in the presence of a suitable base, such as for example K₂CO₃, and asuitable solvent, such as for example an alcohol, e.g. methanol and thelike;(xii) the reaction of a compound of formula (XXXI)

with W₈—CN, wherein W₈ represents a suitable leaving group, such as forexample halo, e.g. bromo, in the presence of a suitable base, such asfor example NaHCO₃, and a suitable solvent, such as for example water ordioxane;(xiii) the reaction of a compound of formula (XXXV)

with a suitable base, such as for example N,N-diisopropylethylamine andtriethylamine, in the presence of a suitable solvent, such as forexample an alcohol, e.g. methanol;(xiv) deprotecting a compound of formula (XXVI) wherein P represents asuitable protective group such as for example —Si(CH₃)₂(C(CH₃)₃) or

wherein Y′N represents an -E-D moiety wherein the D ring moiety containsa nitrogen atom

in the presence of a suitable acid, such as for example HCl ortrifluoroacetic acid, or a suitable de-silylating agent, such as forexample tetrabutyl ammonium fluoride, and a suitable solvent, such as analcohol, e.g. methanol, or tetrahydrofuran;(xv) the reaction of a compound of formula (XXIX) wherein Y′N representsan -E-D moiety wherein the D ring moiety contains a nitrogen atom, witha compound of formula (XXI)

in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents such as,1-hydroxy-benzotriazole and 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide HCl;(xvi) the reaction of a compound of formula (XXIX) wherein Y′Nrepresents an -E-D moiety wherein the D ring moiety contains a nitrogenatom

with NHR⁴R⁵ in the presence of suitable peptide coupling reagents suchas 1-hydroxy-benzotriazole and 1-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide HCl and a suitable base, such as triethylamine, and asuitable solvent, such as for example dichloromethane;(xvii) reacting the below compound

with NHR⁷R⁸ in the presence of a suitable base, such as for exampleK₂CO₃, and a suitable solvent, such as for example tetrahydrofuran;(xviii) deprotecting the below compound

in the presence of hydrazine monohydrate, and a suitable solvent, suchas for example an alcohol, e.g. ethanol;

-   -   wherein the variables are as defined herein; and optionally        thereafter converting one compound of the formula (I) into        another compound of the formula (I).

A further embodiment is a process for synthesis of a compound of formula(VI) wherein:

a compound of formula (IV) is reacted with an intermediate of formula(V) in the presence of a suitable catalyst, such as for examplepalladium (II) acetate, a suitable base, such as sodium tert-butoxide orCs₂CO₃, a suitable ligand, such as for example1,1′-[1,1′-binaphthalene]-2,2′-diylbis[1,1-diphenylphosphine], and asuitable solvent or solvent mixture, such as for example dioxane orethylene glycol dimethylether and water.

Alternatively a compound of formula (IV) is reacted with an intermediateof formula (V) in the presence of a suitable solvent such as for examplean alcohol, e.g. isopropanol, and optionally in the presence of asuitable acid such as for example hydrochloric acid. Alternatively acompound of formula (IV) is reacted with an intermediate of formula (V)in the presence of a suitable deprotonating agent such as for examplepotassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide, in the presence of a suitablesolvent such as for example tetrahydrofuran.

In a further embodiment the invention provides a novel intermediate. Inone embodiment the invention provides a novel intermediate as describedherein. In another embodiment the invention provides a novelintermediate of formula (VI) or formula (IX).

In one embodiment, the present invention also relates to a compoundhaving the following formula:

wherein E′ represents —(CR²²R²³)_(n)—, C₂₋₄alkenediyl optionallysubstituted with R²², C₂₋₄alkynediyl optionally substituted with R²²,—CO—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—, —(CR²²R²³)_(s)—CO—, —NR²²—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—,—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—NR²²—, —O—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—, —(CR²²R²³)_(s)—O—,—S(O)_(m)—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—, —(CR²²R²³)_(s)—S(O)_(m)—,—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—CO—NR²²—(CR²²R²³)_(s)— or—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—NR²²—CO—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—;wherein Y, D, R², X¹, X², X³ and n are as defined for a compound offormula (I-A) above.Pharmaceutically Acceptable Salts, Solvates or Derivatives Thereof

In this section, as in all other sections of this application, unlessthe context indicates otherwise, references to formula (I) includereferences to all other sub-groups, preferences, embodiments andexamples thereof as defined herein.

Unless otherwise specified, a reference to a particular compound alsoincludes ionic forms, salts, solvates, isomers, tautomers, N-oxides,esters, prodrugs, isotopes and protected forms thereof, for example, asdiscussed below; preferably, the ionic forms, or salts or tautomers orisomers or N-oxides or solvates thereof; and more preferably, the ionicforms, or salts or tautomers or solvates or protected forms thereof,even more preferably the salts or tautomers or solvates thereof. Manycompounds of the formula (I) can exist in the form of salts, for exampleacid addition salts or, in certain cases salts of organic and inorganicbases such as carboxylate, sulphonate and phosphate salts. All suchsalts are within the scope of this invention, and references tocompounds of the formula (I) include the salt forms of the compounds. Itwill be appreciated that references to “derivatives” include referencesto ionic forms, salts, solvates, isomers, tautomers, N-oxides, esters,prodrugs, isotopes and protected forms thereof.

According to one aspect of the invention there is provided a compound asdefined herein or a salt, tautomer, N-oxide or solvate thereof.According to a further aspect of the invention there is provided acompound as defined herein or a salt or solvate thereof. References tocompounds of the formula (I) and sub-groups thereof as defined hereininclude within their scope the salts or solvates or tautomers orN-oxides of the compounds.

The salt forms of the compounds of the invention are typicallypharmaceutically acceptable salts, and examples of pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts are discussed in Berge et al. (1977) “PharmaceuticallyAcceptable Salts,” J. Pharm. Sci., Vol. 66, pp. 1-19. However, saltsthat are not pharmaceutically acceptable may also be prepared asintermediate forms which may then be converted into pharmaceuticallyacceptable salts. Such non-pharmaceutically acceptable salts forms,which may be useful, for example, in the purification or separation ofthe compounds of the invention, also form part of the invention.

The salts of the present invention can be synthesized from the parentcompound that contains a basic or acidic moiety by conventional chemicalmethods such as methods described in Pharmaceutical Salts: Properties,Selection, and Use, P. Heinrich Stahl (Editor), Camille G. Wermuth(Editor), ISBN: 3-90639-026-8, Hardcover, 388 pages, August 2002.Generally, such salts can be prepared by reacting the free acid or baseforms of these compounds with the appropriate base or acid in water orin an organic solvent, or in a mixture of the two; generally, nonaqueousmedia such as ether, ethyl acetate, ethanol, isopropanol, oracetonitrile are used. The compounds of the invention may exist as mono-or di-salts depending upon the pKa of the acid from which the salt isformed.

Acid addition salts may be formed with a wide variety of acids, bothinorganic and organic. Examples of acid addition salts include saltsformed with an acid selected from the group consisting of acetic,2,2-dichloroacetic, adipic, alginic, ascorbic (e.g. L-ascorbic),L-aspartic, benzenesulphonic, benzoic, 4-acetamidobenzoic, butanoic, (+)camphoric, camphor-sulphonic, (+)-(1S)-camphor-10-sulphonic, capric,caproic, caprylic, cinnamic, citric, cyclamic, dodecylsulphuric,ethane-1,2-disulphonic, ethanesulphonic, 2-hydroxyethanesulphonic,formic, fumaric, galactaric, gentisic, glucoheptonic, D-gluconic,glucuronic (e.g. D-glucuronic), glutamic (e.g. L-glutamic),α-oxoglutaric, glycolic, hippuric, hydrobromic, hydrochloric, hydriodic,isethionic, lactic (e.g. (+)-L-lactic, (±)-DL-lactic), lactobionic,maleic, malic, (−)-L-malic, malonic, (±)-DL-mandelic, methanesulphonic,naphthalenesulphonic (e.g. naphthalene-2-sulphonic),naphthalene-1,5-disulphonic, 1-hydroxy-2-naphthoic, nicotinic, nitric,oleic, orotic, oxalic, palmitic, pamoic, phosphoric, propionic,L-pyroglutamic, pyruvic, salicylic, 4-amino-salicylic, sebacic, stearic,succinic, sulphuric, tannic, (+)-L-tartaric, thiocyanic,toluenesulphonic (e.g. p-toluenesulphonic), undecylenic and valericacids, as well as acylated amino acids and cation exchange resins.

One particular group of salts consists of salts formed from acetic,hydrochloric, hydriodic, phosphoric, nitric, sulphuric, citric, lactic,succinic, maleic, malic, isethionic, fumaric, benzenesulphonic,toluenesulphonic, methanesulphonic (mesylate), ethanesulphonic,naphthalenesulphonic, valeric, acetic, propanoic, butanoic, malonic,glucuronic and lactobionic acids. Another group of acid addition saltsincludes salts formed from acetic, adipic, ascorbic, aspartic, citric,DL-Lactic, fumaric, gluconic, glucuronic, hippuric, hydrochloric,glutamic, DL-malic, methanesulphonic, sebacic, stearic, succinic andtartaric acids.

If the compound is anionic, or has a functional group which may beanionic (e.g., —COOH may be —COO—), then a salt may be formed with asuitable cation. Examples of suitable inorganic cations include, but arenot limited to, alkali metal ions such as Na⁺ and K⁺, alkaline earthmetal cations such as Ca²⁺ and Mg²⁺, and other cations such as Al³⁺.Examples of suitable organic cations include, but are not limited to,ammonium ion (i.e., NH₄ ⁺) and substituted ammonium ions (e.g., NH₃R⁺,NH₂R₂ ⁺, NHR₃ ⁺, NR₄ ⁺).

Examples of some suitable substituted ammonium ions are those derivedfrom: ethylamine, diethylamine, dicyclohexylamine, triethylamine,butylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine,benzylamine, phenylbenzylamine, choline, meglumine, and tromethamine, aswell as amino acids, such as lysine and arginine. An example of a commonquaternary ammonium ion is N(CH₃)₄ ⁺.

Where the compounds of the formula (I) contain an amine function, thesemay form quaternary ammonium salts, for example by reaction with analkylating agent according to methods well known to the skilled person.Such quaternary ammonium compounds are within the scope of formula (I).Compounds of the formula (I) containing an amine function may also formN-oxides. A reference herein to a compound of the formula (I) thatcontains an amine function also includes the N-oxide. Where a compoundcontains several amine functions, one or more than one nitrogen atom maybe oxidised to form an N-oxide. Particular examples of N-oxides are theN-oxides of a tertiary amine or a nitrogen atom of a nitrogen-containingheterocycle. N-Oxides can be formed by treatment of the correspondingamine with an oxidizing agent such as hydrogen peroxide or a per-acid(e.g. a peroxycarboxylic acid), see for example Advanced OrganicChemistry, by Jerry March, 4^(th) Edition, Wiley Interscience, pages.More particularly, N-oxides can be made by the procedure of L. W. Deady(Syn. Comm. (1977), 7, 509-514) in which the amine compound is reactedwith m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid (MCPBA), for example, in an inertsolvent such as dichloromethane.

The compounds of the invention may form solvates, for example with water(i.e., hydrates) or common organic solvents. As used herein, the term“solvate” means a physical association of the compounds of the presentinvention with one or more solvent molecules. This physical associationinvolves varying degrees of ionic and covalent bonding, includinghydrogen bonding. In certain instances the solvate will be capable ofisolation, for example when one or more solvent molecules areincorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid. The term“solvate” is intended to encompass both solution-phase and isolatablesolvates. Non-limiting examples of suitable solvates include compoundsof the invention in combination with water, isopropanol, ethanol,methanol, DMSO, ethyl acetate, acetic acid or ethanolamine and the like.The compounds of the invention may exert their biological effects whilstthey are in solution.

Solvates are well known in pharmaceutical chemistry. They can beimportant to the processes for the preparation of a substance (e.g. inrelation to their purification, the storage of the substance (e.g. itsstability) and the ease of handling of the substance and are oftenformed as part of the isolation or purification stages of a chemicalsynthesis. A person skilled in the art can determine by means ofstandard and long used techniques whether a hydrate or other solvate hasformed by the isolation conditions or purification conditions used toprepare a given compound. Examples of such techniques includethermogravimetric analysis (TGA), differential scanning calorimetry(DSC), X-ray crystallography (e.g. single crystal X-ray crystallographyor X-ray powder diffraction) and Solid State NMR (SS-NMR, also known asMagic Angle Spinning NMR or MAS-NMR). Such techniques are as much a partof the standard analytical toolkit of the skilled chemist as NMR, IR,HPLC and MS. Alternatively the skilled person can deliberately form asolvate using crystallisation conditions that include an amount of thesolvent required for the particular solvate. Thereafter the standardmethods described above, can be used to establish whether solvates hadformed. Also encompassed by formula (I) are any complexes (e.g.inclusion complexes or clathrates with compounds such as cyclodextrins,or complexes with metals) of the compounds.

Furthermore, the compounds of the present invention may have one or morepolymorph (crystalline) or amorphous forms and as such are intended tobe included in the scope of the invention.

Compounds of the formula (I) may exist in a number of differentgeometric isomeric, and tautomeric forms and references to compounds ofthe formula (I) include all such forms. For the avoidance of doubt,where a compound can exist in one of several geometric isomeric ortautomeric forms and only one is specifically described or shown, allothers are nevertheless embraced by formula (I). Other examples oftautomeric forms include, for example, keto-, enol-, and enolate-forms,as in, for example, the following tautomeric pairs: keto/enol(illustrated below), imine/enamine, amide/imino alcohol,amidine/enediamines, nitroso/oxime, thioketone/enethiol, andnitro/aci-nitro.

Where compounds of the formula (I) contain one or more chiral centres,and can exist in the form of two or more optical isomers, references tocompounds of the formula (I) include all optical isomeric forms thereof(e.g. enantiomers, epimers and diastereoisomers), either as individualoptical isomers, or mixtures (e.g. racemic mixtures) of two or moreoptical isomers, unless the context requires otherwise. The opticalisomers may be characterised and identified by their optical activity(i.e. as + and − isomers, or d and l isomers) or they may becharacterised in terms of their absolute stereochemistry using the “Rand S” nomenclature developed by Cahn, Ingold and Prelog, see AdvancedOrganic Chemistry by Jerry March, 4^(th) Edition, John Wiley & Sons, NewYork, 1992, pages 109-114, and see also Cahn, Ingold & Prelog (1966)Angew. Chem. Int. Ed. Engl., 5, 385-415. Optical isomers can beseparated by a number of techniques including chiral chromatography(chromatography on a chiral support) and such techniques are well knownto the person skilled in the art. As an alternative to chiralchromatography, optical isomers can be separated by formingdiastereoisomeric salts with chiral acids such as (+)-tartaric acid,(−)-pyroglutamic acid, (−)-di-toluoyl-L-tartaric acid, (+)-mandelicacid, (−)-malic acid, and (−)-camphorsulphonic, separating thediastereoisomers by preferential crystallisation, and then dissociatingthe salts to give the individual enantiomer of the free base.

Where compounds of the formula (I) exist as two or more optical isomericforms, one enantiomer in a pair of enantiomers may exhibit advantagesover the other enantiomer, for example, in terms of biological activity.Thus, in certain circumstances, it may be desirable to use as atherapeutic agent only one of a pair of enantiomers, or only one of aplurality of diastereoisomers. Accordingly, the invention providescompositions containing a compound of the formula (I) having one or morechiral centres, wherein at least 55% (e.g. at least 60%, 65%, 70%, 75%,80%, 85%, 90% or 95%) of the compound of the formula (I) is present as asingle optical isomer (e.g. enantiomer or diastereoisomer). In onegeneral embodiment, 99% or more (e.g. substantially all) of the totalamount of the compound of the formula (I) may be present as a singleoptical isomer (e.g. enantiomer or diastereoisomer). When a specificisomeric form is identified (e.g. S configuration, or E isomer), thismeans that said isomeric form is substantially free of the otherisomer(s), i.e. said isomeric form is present in at least 55%, 60%, 65%,70%, 75%, 80%, 85%, 90%, 95%, 99% or more (e.g. substantially all) ofthe total amount of the compound of the invention.

The compounds of the invention include compounds with one or moreisotopic substitutions, and a reference to a particular element includeswithin its scope all isotopes of the element. For example, a referenceto hydrogen includes within its scope ¹H, ²H (D), and ³H (T). Similarly,references to carbon and oxygen include within their scope respectively¹²C, ¹³C and ¹⁴C and ¹⁶O and ¹⁸O. The isotopes may be radioactive ornon-radioactive. In one embodiment of the invention, the compoundscontain no radioactive isotopes. Such compounds are preferred fortherapeutic use. In another embodiment, however, the compound maycontain one or more radioisotopes. Compounds containing suchradioisotopes may be useful in a diagnostic context.

Esters such as carboxylic acid esters and acyloxy esters of thecompounds of formula (I) bearing a carboxylic acid group or a hydroxylgroup are also embraced by formula (I). In one embodiment of theinvention, formula (I) includes within its scope esters of compounds ofthe formula (I) bearing a carboxylic acid group or a hydroxyl group. Inanother embodiment of the invention, formula (I) does not include withinits scope esters of compounds of the formula (I) bearing a carboxylicacid group or a hydroxyl group. Examples of esters are compoundscontaining the group —C(═O)OR, wherein R is an ester substituent, forexample, a C₁₋₆ alkyl group, a heterocyclyl group, or a C₅₋₂₀ arylgroup, preferably a C₁₋₆ alkyl group. Particular examples of estergroups include, but are not limited to, —C(═O)OCH₃, —C(═O)OCH₂CH₃,—C(═O)OC(CH₃)₃, and —C(═O)OPh. Examples of acyloxy (reverse ester)groups are represented by —OC(═O)R, wherein R is an acyloxy substituent,for example, a C₁₋₇ alkyl group, a C₃₋₂₀ heterocyclyl group, or a C₅₋₂₀aryl group, preferably a C₁₋₇ alkyl group. Particular examples ofacyloxy groups include, but are not limited to, —OC(═O)CH₃ (acetoxy),—OC(═O)CH₂CH₃, —OC(═O)C(CH₃)₃, —OC(═O)Ph, and —OC(═O)CH₂Ph.

For example, some prodrugs are esters of the active compound (e.g., aphysiologically acceptable metabolically labile ester). By “prodrugs” ismeant for example any compound that is converted in vivo into abiologically active compound of the formula (I). During metabolism, theester group (—C(═O)OR) is cleaved to yield the active drug. Such estersmay be formed by esterification, for example, of any of the carboxylicacid groups (—C(═O)OH) in the parent compound, with, where appropriate,prior protection of any other reactive groups present in the parentcompound, followed by deprotection if required.

Examples of such metabolically labile esters include those of theformula —C(═O)OR wherein R is: C₁₋₆alkyl (e.g., -Me, -Et, -nPr, -iPr,-nBu, -sBu, -iBu, -tBu); C₁₋₆aminoalkyl [e.g., aminoethyl;2-(N,N-diethylamino)ethyl; 2-(4-morpholino)ethyl); and acyloxy-C₁₋₇alkyl[e.g., acyloxymethyl; acyloxyethyl; pivaloyloxymethyl; acetoxymethyl;1-acetoxyethyl; 1-(1-methoxy-1-methyl)ethyl-carbonyloxyethyl;1-(benzoyloxy)ethyl; isopropoxy-carbonyloxymethyl;1-isopropoxy-carbonyloxyethyl; cyclohexyl-carbonyloxymethyl;1-cyclohexyl-carbonyloxyethyl; cyclohexyloxy-carbonyloxymethyl;1-cyclohexyloxy-carbonyloxyethyl; (4-tetrahydropyranyloxy)carbonyloxymethyl; 1-(4-tetrahydropyranyloxy)carbonyloxyethyl;(4-tetrahydropyranyl)carbonyloxymethyl; and1-(4-tetrahydropyranyl)carbonyloxyethyl]. Also, some prodrugs areactivated enzymatically to yield the active compound, or a compoundwhich, upon further chemical reaction, yields the active compound (forexample, as in antigen-directed enzyme pro-drug therapy (ADEPT),gene-directed enzyme pro-drug therapy (GDEPT) and ligand-directed enzymepro-drug therapy (LIDEPT) etc.). For example, the prodrug may be a sugarderivative or other glycoside conjugate, or may be an amino acid esterderivative.

Protein Tyrosine Kinases (PTK)

The compounds of the invention described herein inhibit or modulate theactivity of certain tyrosine kinases, and thus the compounds will beuseful in the treatment or prophylaxis, in particular the treatment, ofdisease states or conditions mediated by those tyrosine kinases, inparticular FGFR.

FGFR

The fibroblast growth factor (FGF) family of protein tyrosine kinase(PTK) receptors regulates a diverse array of physiologic functionsincluding mitogenesis, wound healing, cell differentiation andangiogenesis, and development. Both normal and malignant cell growth aswell as proliferation are affected by changes in local concentration ofFGFs, extracellular signalling molecules which act as autocrine as wellas paracrine factors. Autocrine FGF signalling may be particularlyimportant in the progression of steroid hormone-dependent cancers to ahormone independent state. FGFs and their receptors are expressed atincreased levels in several tissues and cell lines and overexpression isbelieved to contribute to the malignant phenotype. Furthermore, a numberof oncogenes are homologues of genes encoding growth factor receptors,and there is a potential for aberrant activation of FGF-dependentsignalling in human pancreatic cancer (Knights et al., Pharmacology andTherapeutics 2010 125:1 (105-117); Korc M. et al Current Cancer DrugTargets 2009 9:5 (639-651)).

The two prototypic members are acidic fibroblast growth factor (aFGF orFGF1) and basic fibroblast growth factor (bFGF or FGF2), and to date, atleast twenty distinct FGF family members have been identified. Thecellular response to FGFs is transmitted via four types of high affinitytransmembrane protein tyrosine-kinase fibroblast growth factor receptors(FGFR) numbered 1 to 4 (FGFR1 to FGFR4).

Disruption of the FGFR1 pathway should affect tumor cell proliferationsince this kinase is activated in many tumor types in addition toproliferating endothelial cells. The over-expression and activation ofFGFR1 in tumor-associated vasculature has suggested a role for thesemolecules in tumor angiogenesis.

A recent study has shown a link between FGFR1 expression andtumorigenicity in Classic Lobular Carcinomas (CLC). CLCs account for10-15% of all breast cancers and, in general, lack p53 and Her2expression whilst retaining expression of the oestrogen receptor. A geneamplification of 8p12-p11.2 was demonstrated in 50% of CLC cases andthis was shown to be linked with an increased expression of FGFR1.Preliminary studies with siRNA directed against FGFR1, or a smallmolecule inhibitor of the receptor, showed cell lines harbouring thisamplification to be particularly sensitive to inhibition of thissignalling pathway. Rhabdomyosarcoma (RMS) is the most common pediatricsoft tissue sarcoma likely results from abnormal proliferation anddifferentiation during skeletal myogenesis. FGFR1 is over-expressed inprimary rhabdomyosarcoma tumors and is associated with hypomethylationof a 5′ CpG island and abnormal expression of the AKT1, NOG, and BMP4genes. FGFR1 has also been linked to squamous lung cancer, colorectalcancer, glioblastoma, astrocytomas, prostate cancer, small cell lungcancer, melanoma, head and neck cancer, thyroid cancer, uterine cancer.

Fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 has high affinity for the acidicand/or basic fibroblast growth factors, as well as the keratinocytegrowth factor ligands. Fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 alsopropagates the potent osteogenic effects of FGFs during osteoblastgrowth and differentiation. Mutations in fibroblast growth factorreceptor 2, leading to complex functional alterations, were shown toinduce abnormal ossification of cranial sutures (craniosynostosis),implying a major role of FGFR signalling in intramembranous boneformation. For example, in Apert (AP) syndrome, characterized bypremature cranial suture ossification, most cases are associated withpoint mutations engendering gain-of-function in fibroblast growth factorreceptor 2. In addition, mutation screening in patients with syndromiccraniosynostoses indicates that a number of recurrent FGFR2 mutationsaccounts for severe forms of Pfeiffer syndrome. Particular mutations ofFGFR2 include W290C, D321A, Y340C, C342R, C342S, C342W, N549H, K641R inFGFR2.

Several severe abnormalities in human skeletal development, includingApert, Crouzon, Jackson-Weiss, Beare-Stevenson cutis gyrata, andPfeiffer syndromes are associated with the occurrence of mutations infibroblast growth factor receptor 2. Most, if not all, cases of PfeifferSyndrome (PS) are also caused by de novo mutation of the fibroblastgrowth factor receptor 2 gene, and it was recently shown that mutationsin fibroblast growth factor receptor 2 break one of the cardinal rulesgoverning ligand specificity. Namely, two mutant splice forms offibroblast growth factor receptor, FGFR2c and FGFR2b, have acquired theability to bind to and be activated by atypical FGF ligands. This lossof ligand specificity leads to aberrant signalling and suggests that thesevere phenotypes of these disease syndromes result from ectopicligand-dependent activation of fibroblast growth factor receptor 2.

Genetic aberrations of the FGFR3 receptor tyrosine kinase such aschromosomal translocations or point mutations result in ectopicallyexpressed or deregulated, constitutively active, FGFR3 receptors. Suchabnormalities are linked to a subset of multiple myelomas and inbladder, hepatocellular, oral squamous cell carcinoma and cervicalcarcinomas. Accordingly, FGFR3 inhibitors would be useful in thetreatment of multiple myeloma, bladder and cervical carcinomas. FGFR3 isalso over-expressed in bladder cancer, in particular invasive bladdercancer. FGFR3 is frequently activated by mutation in urothelialcarcinoma (UC). Increased expression was associated with mutation (85%of mutant tumors showed high-level expression) but also 42% of tumorswith no detectable mutation showed over-expression, including manymuscle-invasive tumors. FGFR3 is also linked to endometrial and thyroidcancer.

Over expression of FGFR4 has been linked to poor prognosis in bothprostate and thyroid carcinomas. In addition a germline polymorphism(Gly388Arg) is associated with increased incidence of lung, breast,colon, liver (HCC) and prostate cancers. In addition, a truncated formof FGFR4 (including the kinase domain) has also been found to be presentin 40% of pituitary tumours but not present in normal tissue. FGFR4overexpression has been observed in liver, colon and lung tumours. FGFR4has been implicated in colorectal and liver cancer where expression ofits ligand FGF19 is frequently elevated. FGFR4 is also linked toastrocytomas, rhabdomyosarcoma.

Fibrotic conditions are a major medical problem resulting from abnormalor excessive deposition of fibrous tissue. This occurs in many diseases,including liver cirrhosis, glomerulonephritis, pulmonary fibrosis,systemic fibrosis, rheumatoid arthritis, as well as the natural processof wound healing. The mechanisms of pathological fibrosis are not fullyunderstood but are thought to result from the actions of variouscytokines (including tumor necrosis factor (TNF), fibroblast growthfactors (FGF's), platelet derived growth factor (PDGF) and transforminggrowth factor beta. (TGFβ) involved in the proliferation of fibroblastsand the deposition of extracellular matrix proteins (including collagenand fibronectin). This results in alteration of tissue structure andfunction and subsequent pathology.

A number of preclinical studies have demonstrated the up-regulation offibroblast growth factors in preclinical models of lung fibrosis. TGFβ1and PDGF have been reported to be involved in the fibrogenic process andfurther published work suggests the elevation of FGF's and consequentincrease in fibroblast proliferation, may be in response to elevatedTGFβ1. The potential therapeutic benefit of targeting the fibroticmechanism in conditions such as idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis (IPF) issuggested by the reported clinical effect of the anti-fibrotic agentpirfenidone. Idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis (also referred to asCryptogenic fibrosing alveolitis) is a progressive condition involvingscarring of the lung. Gradually, the air sacs of the lungs becomereplaced by fibrotic tissue, which becomes thicker, causing anirreversible loss of the tissue's ability to transfer oxygen into thebloodstream. The symptoms of the condition include shortness of breath,chronic dry coughing, fatigue, chest pain and loss of appetite resultingin rapid weight loss. The condition is extremely serious withapproximately 50% mortality after 5 years.

As such, the compounds which inhibit FGFR will be useful in providing ameans of preventing the growth or inducing apoptosis in tumours,particularly by inhibiting angiogenesis. It is therefore anticipatedthat the compounds will prove useful in treating or preventingproliferative disorders such as cancers. In particular tumours withactivating mutants of receptor tyrosine kinases or upregulation ofreceptor tyrosine kinases may be particularly sensitive to theinhibitors. Patients with activating mutants of any of the isoforms ofthe specific RTKs discussed herein may also find treatment with RTKinhibitors particularly beneficial.

Vascular Endothelial Growth Factor (VEGFR)

Chronic proliferative diseases are often accompanied by profoundangiogenesis, which can contribute to or maintain an inflammatory and/orproliferative state, or which leads to tissue destruction through theinvasive proliferation of blood vessels.

Angiogenesis is generally used to describe the development of new orreplacement blood vessels, or neovascularisation. It is a necessary andphysiological normal process by which vasculature is established in theembryo. Angiogenesis does not occur, in general, in most normal adulttissues, exceptions being sites of ovulation, menses and wound healing.Many diseases, however, are characterized by persistent and unregulatedangiogenesis. For instance, in arthritis, new capillary blood vesselsinvade the joint and destroy cartilage. In diabetes (and in manydifferent eye diseases), new vessels invade the macula or retina orother ocular structures, and may cause blindness. The process ofatherosclerosis has been linked to angiogenesis. Tumor growth andmetastasis have been found to be angiogenesis-dependent.

The recognition of the involvement of angiogenesis in major diseases hasbeen accompanied by research to identify and develop inhibitors ofangiogenesis. These inhibitors are generally classified in response todiscrete targets in the angiogenesis cascade, such as activation ofendothelial cells by an angiogenic signal; synthesis and release ofdegradative enzymes; endothelial cell migration; proliferation ofendothelial cells; and formation of capillary tubules. Therefore,angiogenesis occurs in many stages and attempts are underway to discoverand develop compounds that work to block angiogenesis at these variousstages.

There are publications that teach that inhibitors of angiogenesis,working by diverse mechanisms, are beneficial in diseases such as cancerand metastasis, ocular diseases, arthritis and hemangioma.

Vascular endothelial growth factor (VEGF), a polypeptide, is mitogenicfor endothelial cells in vitro and stimulates angiogenic responses invivo. VEGF has also been linked to inappropriate angiogenesis. VEGFR(s)are protein tyrosine kinases (PTKs). PTKs catalyze the phosphorylationof specific tyrosine residues in proteins involved in cell function thusregulating cell growth, survival and differentiation.

Three PTK receptors for VEGF have been identified: VEGFR-1 (Flt-1);VEGFR-2 (Flk-1 or KDR) and VEGFR-3 (Flt-4). These receptors are involvedin angiogenesis and participate in signal transduction. Of particularinterest is VEGFR-2, which is a transmembrane receptor PTK expressedprimarily in endothelial cells. Activation of VEGFR-2 by VEGF is acritical step in the signal transduction pathway that initiates tumourangiogenesis. VEGF expression may be constitutive to tumour cells andcan also be upregulated in response to certain stimuli. One such stimuliis hypoxia, where VEGF expression is upregulated in both tumour andassociated host tissues. The VEGF ligand activates VEGFR-2 by bindingwith its extracellular VEGF binding site. This leads to receptordimerization of VEGFRs and autophosphorylation of tyrosine residues atthe intracellular kinase domain of VEGFR-2. The kinase domain operatesto transfer a phosphate from ATP to the tyrosine residues, thusproviding binding sites for signalling proteins downstream of VEGFR-2leading ultimately to initiation of angiogenesis.

Inhibition at the kinase domain binding site of VEGFR-2 would blockphosphorylation of tyrosine residues and serve to disrupt initiation ofangiogenesis.

Angiogenesis is a physiologic process of new blood vessel formationmediated by various cytokines called angiogenic factors. Although itspotential pathophysiologic role in solid tumors has been extensivelystudied for more than 3 decades, enhancement of angiogenesis in chroniclymphocytic leukemia (CLL) and other malignant hematological disordershas been recognized more recently. An increased level of angiogenesishas been documented by various experimental methods both in bone marrowand lymph nodes of patients with CLL. Although the role of angiogenesisin the pathophysiology of this disease remains to be fully elucidated,experimental data suggest that several angiogenic factors play a role inthe disease progression. Biologic markers of angiogenesis were alsoshown to be of prognostic relevance in CLL. This indicates that VEGFRinhibitors may also be of benefit for patients with leukemia's such asCLL.

In order for a tumour mass to get beyond a critical size, it mustdevelop an associated vasculature. It has been proposed that targeting atumor vasculature would limit tumor expansion and could be a usefulcancer therapy. Observations of tumor growth have indicated that smalltumour masses can persist in a tissue without any tumour-specificvasculature. The growth arrest of nonvascularized tumors has beenattributed to the effects of hypoxia at the center of the tumor. Morerecently, a variety of proangiogenic and antiangiogenic factors havebeen identified and have led to the concept of the “angiogenic switch,”a process in which disruption of the normal ratio of angiogenic stimuliand inhibitors in a tumor mass allows for autonomous vascularization.The angiogenic switch appears to be governed by the same geneticalterations that drive malignant conversion: the activation of oncogenesand the loss of tumour suppressor genes. Several growth factors act aspositive regulators of angiogenesis. Foremost among these are vascularendothelial growth factor (VEGF), basic fibroblast growth factor (bFGF),and angiogenin. Proteins such as thrombospondin (Tsp-1), angiostatin,and endostatin function as negative regulators of angiogenesis.

Inhibition of VEGFR2 but not VEGFR1 markedly disrupts angiogenicswitching, persistent angiogenesis, and initial tumor growth in a mousemodel. In late-stage tumors, phenotypic resistance to VEGFR2 blockadeemerged, as tumors regrew during treatment after an initial period ofgrowth suppression. This resistance to VEGF blockade involvesreactivation of tumour angiogenesis, independent of VEGF and associatedwith hypoxia-mediated induction of other proangiogenic factors,including members of the FGF family. These other proangiogenic signalsare functionally implicated in the revascularization and regrowth oftumours in the evasion phase, as FGF blockade impairs progression in theface of VEGF inhibition.

There is evidence for normalization of glioblastoma blood vessels inpatients treated with a pan-VEGF receptor tyrosine kinase inhibitor,AZD2171, in a phase 2 study. MRI determination of vessel normalizationin combination with circulating biomarkers provides for an effectivemeans to assess response to antiangiogenic agents.

PDGFR

A malignant tumour is the product of uncontrolled cell proliferation.Cell growth is controlled by a delicate balance between growth-promotingand growth-inhibiting factors. In normal tissue the production andactivity of these factors results in differentiated cells growing in acontrolled and regulated manner that maintains the normal integrity andfunctioning of the organ. The malignant cell has evaded this control;the natural balance is disturbed (via a variety of mechanisms) andunregulated, aberrant cell growth occurs. A growth factor of importancein tumour development is the platelet-derived growth factor (PDGF) thatcomprises a family of peptide growth factors that signal through cellsurface tyrosine kinase receptors (PDGFR) and stimulate various cellularfunctions including growth, proliferation, and differentiation.

Advantages of a Selective Inhibitor

Development of FGFR kinase inhibitors with a differentiated selectivityprofile provides a new opportunity to use these targeted agents inpatient sub-groups whose disease is driven by FGFR deregulation.Compounds that exhibit reduced inhibitory action on additional kinases,particularly VEGFR2 and PDGFR-beta, offer the opportunity to have adifferentiated side-effect or toxicity profile and as such allow for amore effective treatment of these indications. Inhibitors of VEGFR2 andPDGFR-beta are associated with toxicities such as hypertension or oedemarespectively. In the case of VEGFR2 inhibitors this hypertensive effectis often dose limiting, may be contraindicated in certain patientpopulations and requires clinical management.

Biological Activity and Therapeutic Uses

The compounds of the invention, and subgroups thereof, have fibroblastgrowth factor receptor (FGFR) inhibiting or modulating activity and/orvascular endothelial growth factor receptor (VEGFR) inhibiting ormodulating activity, and/or platelet derived growth factor receptor(PDGFR) inhibiting or modulating activity, and which will be useful inpreventing or treating disease states or conditions described herein. Inaddition the compounds of the invention, and subgroups thereof, will beuseful in preventing or treating diseases or condition mediated by thekinases. References to the preventing or prophylaxis or treatment of adisease state or condition such as cancer include within their scopealleviating or reducing the incidence of cancer.

As used herein, the term “modulation”, as applied to the activity of akinase, is intended to define a change in the level of biologicalactivity of the protein kinase. Thus, modulation encompassesphysiological changes which effect an increase or decrease in therelevant protein kinase activity. In the latter case, the modulation maybe described as “inhibition”. The modulation may arise directly orindirectly, and may be mediated by any mechanism and at anyphysiological level, including for example at the level of geneexpression (including for example transcription, translation and/orpost-translational modification), at the level of expression of genesencoding regulatory elements which act directly or indirectly on thelevels of kinase activity. Thus, modulation may implyelevated/suppressed expression or over- or under-expression of a kinase,including gene amplification (i.e. multiple gene copies) and/orincreased or decreased expression by a transcriptional effect, as wellas hyper- (or hypo-)activity and (de)activation of the protein kinase(s)(including (de)activation) by mutation(s). The terms “modulated”,“modulating” and “modulate” are to be interpreted accordingly.

As used herein, the term “mediated”, as used e.g. in conjunction with akinase as described herein (and applied for example to variousphysiological processes, diseases, states, conditions, therapies,treatments or interventions) is intended to operate limitatively so thatthe various processes, diseases, states, conditions, treatments andinterventions to which the term is applied are those in which the kinaseplays a biological role. In cases where the term is applied to adisease, state or condition, the biological role played by a kinase maybe direct or indirect and may be necessary and/or sufficient for themanifestation of the symptoms of the disease, state or condition (or itsaetiology or progression). Thus, kinase activity (and in particularaberrant levels of kinase activity, e.g. kinase over-expression) neednot necessarily be the proximal cause of the disease, state orcondition: rather, it is contemplated that the kinase mediated diseases,states or conditions include those having multifactorial aetiologies andcomplex progressions in which the kinase in question is only partiallyinvolved. In cases where the term is applied to treatment, prophylaxisor intervention, the role played by the kinase may be direct or indirectand may be necessary and/or sufficient for the operation of thetreatment, prophylaxis or outcome of the intervention. Thus, a diseasestate or condition mediated by a kinase includes the development ofresistance to any particular cancer drug or treatment.

Thus, for example, the compounds of the invention may be useful inalleviating or reducing the incidence of cancer.

More particularly, the compounds of the formulae (I) and sub-groupsthereof are inhibitors of FGFRs. For example, compounds of the inventionhave activity against FGFR1, FGFR2, FGFR3, and/or FGFR4, and inparticular FGFRs selected from FGFR1, FGFR2 and FGFR3; or in particularthe compounds of formula (I) and sub-groups thereof are inhibitors ofFGFR4.

Preferred compounds are compounds that inhibit one or more FGFR selectedfrom FGFR1, FGFR2, FGFR3, and FGFR4. Preferred compounds of theinvention are those having IC₅₀ values of less than 0.1 μM.

Compounds of the invention also have activity against VEGFR.

In addition many of the compounds of the invention exhibit selectivityfor the FGFR 1, 2, and/or 3, and/or 4 compared to VEGFR (in particularVEGFR2) and/or PDGFR and such compounds represent one preferredembodiment of the invention. In particular, the compounds exhibitselectivity over VEGFR2. For example, many compounds of the inventionhave IC₅₀ values against FGFR1, 2 and/or 3 and/or 4 that are between atenth and a hundredth of the IC₅₀ against VEGFR (in particular VEGFR2)and/or PDGFR B. In particular preferred compounds of the invention haveat least 10 times greater activity against or inhibition of FGFR inparticular FGFR1, FGFR2, FGFR3 and/or FGFR4 than VEGFR2. More preferablythe compounds of the invention have at least 100 times greater activityagainst or inhibition of FGFR in particular FGFR1, FGFR2, FGFR3 and/orFGFR4 than VEGFR2. This can be determined using the methods describedherein.

As a consequence of their activity in modulating or inhibiting FGFR,and/or VEGFR kinases, the compounds will be useful in providing a meansof preventing the growth or inducing apoptosis of neoplasias,particularly by inhibiting angiogenesis. It is therefore anticipatedthat the compounds will prove useful in treating or preventingproliferative disorders such as cancers. In addition, the compounds ofthe invention could be useful in the treatment of diseases in whichthere is a disorder of proliferation, apoptosis or differentiation.

In particular tumours with activating mutants of VEGFR or upregulationof VEGFR and patients with elevated levels of serum lactatedehydrogenase may be particularly sensitive to the compounds of theinvention. Patients with activating mutants of any of the isoforms ofthe specific RTKs discussed herein may also find treatment with thecompounds of the invention particularly beneficial. For example, VEGFRoverexpression in acute leukemia cells where the clonal progenitor mayexpress VEGFR. Also, particular tumours with activating mutants orupregulation or overexpression of any of the isoforms of FGFR such asFGFR1, FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4 may be particularly sensitive to thecompounds of the invention and thus patients as discussed herein withsuch particular tumours may also find treatment with the compounds ofthe invention particularly beneficial. It may be preferred that thetreatment is related to or directed at a mutated form of one of thereceptor tyrosine kinases, such as discussed herein. Diagnosis oftumours with such mutations could be performed using techniques known toa person skilled in the art and as described herein such as RTPCR andFISH.

Examples of cancers which may be treated (or inhibited) include, but arenot limited to, a carcinoma, for example a carcinoma of the bladder,breast, colon (e.g. colorectal carcinomas such as colon adenocarcinomaand colon adenoma), kidney, urothelial, uterus, epidermis, liver, lung(for example adenocarcinoma, small cell lung cancer and non-small celllung carcinomas, squamous lung cancer), oesophagus, head and neck, gallbladder, ovary, pancreas (e.g. exocrine pancreatic carcinoma), stomach,gastrointestinal (also known as gastric) cancer (e.g. gastrointestinalstromal tumours), cervix, endometrium, thyroid, prostate, or skin (forexample squamous cell carcinoma or dermatofibrosarcoma protuberans);pituitary cancer, a hematopoietic tumour of lymphoid lineage, forexample leukemia, acute lymphocytic leukemia, chronic lymphocyticleukemia, B-cell lymphoma (e.g. diffuse large B-cell lymphoma), T-celllymphoma, Hodgkin's lymphoma, non-Hodgkin's lymphoma, hairy celllymphoma, or Burkett's lymphoma; a hematopoietic tumour of myeloidlineage, for example leukemias, acute and chronic myelogenous leukemias,chronic myelomonocytic leukemia (CMML), myeloproliferative disorder,myeloproliferative syndrome, myelodysplastic syndrome, or promyelocyticleukemia; multiple myeloma; thyroid follicular cancer; hepatocellularcancer, a tumour of mesenchymal origin (e.g. Ewing's sarcoma), forexample fibrosarcoma or rhabdomyosarcoma; a tumour of the central orperipheral nervous system, for example astrocytoma, neuroblastoma,glioma (such as glioblastoma multiforme) or schwannoma; melanoma;seminoma; teratocarcinoma; osteosarcoma; xeroderma pigmentosum;keratoctanthoma; thyroid follicular cancer; or Kaposi's sarcoma. Inparticular, squamous lung cancer, breast cancer, colorectal cancer,glioblastoma, astrocytomas, prostate cancer, small cell lung cancer,melanoma, head and neck cancer, thyroid cancer, uterine cancer, gastriccancer, hepatocellular cancer, cervix cancer, multiple myeloma, bladdercancer, endometrial cancer, urothelial cancer, colon cancer,rhabdomyosarcoma, pituitary gland cancer.

Certain cancers are resistant to treatment with particular drugs. Thiscan be due to the type of the tumour or can arise due to treatment withthe compound. In this regard, references to multiple myeloma includesbortezomib sensitive multiple myeloma or refractory multiple myeloma.Similarly, references to chronic myelogenous leukemia includes imitanibsensitive chronic myelogenous leukemia and refractory chronicmyelogenous leukemia. Chronic myelogenous leukemia is also known aschronic myeloid leukemia, chronic granulocytic leukemia or CML.Likewise, acute myelogenous leukemia, is also called acute myeloblasticleukemia, acute granulocytic leukemia, acute nonlymphocytic leukaemia orAML.

The compounds of the invention can also be used in the treatment ofhematopoetic diseases of abnormal cell proliferation whetherpre-malignant or stable such as myeloproliferative diseases.Myeloproliferative diseases (“MPD”s) are a group of diseases of the bonemarrow in which excess cells are produced. They are related to, and mayevolve into, myelodysplastic syndrome. Myeloproliferative diseasesinclude polycythemia vera, essential thrombocythemia and primarymyelofibrosis. A further haematological disorder is hypereosinophilicsyndrome. T-cell lymphoproliferative diseases include those derived fromnatural Killer cells.

In addition the compounds of the invention can be used togastrointestinal (also known as gastric) cancer e.g. gastrointestinalstromal tumours. Gastrointestinal cancer refers to malignant conditionsof the gastrointestinal tract, including the esophagus, stomach, liver,biliary system, pancreas, bowels, and anus.

Thus, in the pharmaceutical compositions, uses or methods of thisinvention for treating a disease or condition comprising abnormal cellgrowth, the disease or condition comprising abnormal cell growth in oneembodiment is a cancer.

Particular subsets of cancers include multiple myeloma, bladder,cervical, prostate and thyroid carcinomas, lung, breast, and coloncancers.

A further subset of cancers includes multiple myeloma, bladder,hepatocellular, oral squamous cell carcinoma and cervical carcinomas.

The compound of the invention, having FGFR such as FGFR1 inhibitoryactivity, may be particularly useful in the treatment or prevention ofbreast cancer in particular Classic Lobular Carcinomas (CLC).

As the compounds of the invention have FGFR4 activity they will also beuseful in the treatment of prostate or pituitary cancers, or they willbe useful in the treatment of breast cancer, lung cancer, prostatecancer, liver cancer (HCC) or lung cancer.

In particular the compounds of the invention as FGFR inhibitors, areuseful in the treatment of multiple myeloma, myeloproliferatoivedisorders, endometrial cancer, prostate cancer, bladder cancer, lungcancer, ovarian cancer, breast cancer, gastric cancer, colorectalcancer, and oral squamous cell carcinoma.

Further subsets of cancer are multiple myeloma, endometrial cancer,bladder cancer, cervical cancer, prostate cancer, lung cancer, breastcancer, colorectal cancer and thyroid carcinomas.

In particular the compounds of the invention are useful in the treatmentof multiple myeloma (in particular multiple myeloma with t(4;14)translocation or overexpressing FGFR3), prostate cancer (hormonerefractory prostrate carcinomas), endometrial cancer (in particularendometrial tumours with activating mutations in FGFR2) and breastcancer (in particular lobular breast cancer).

In particular the compounds are useful in the treatment of lobularcarcinomas such as CLC (Classic lobular carcinoma).

As the compounds have activity against FGFR3 they will be useful in thetreatment of multiple myeloma and bladder cancer.

In particular the compounds are useful for the treatment of t(4;14)translocation positive multiple myeloma.

In one embodiment the compounds may be useful for the treatment ofsarcoma. In one embodiment the compounds may be useful for the treatmentof lung cancer, e.g. squamous cell carcinoma.

As the compounds have activity against FGFR2 they will be useful in thetreatment of endometrial, ovarian, gastric, hepatocellular, uterine,cervix and colorectal cancers. FGFR2 is also overexpressed in epithelialovarian cancer, therefore the compounds of the invention may bespecifically useful in treating ovarian cancer such as epithelialovarian cancer.

In one embodiment, the compounds may be useful for the treatment of lungcancer, in particular NSCLC, squamous cell carcinoma, liver cancer,kidney cancer, breast cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, prostatecancer.

Compounds of the invention may also be useful in the treatment oftumours pre-treated with VEGFR2 inhibitor or VEGFR2 antibody (e.g.Avastin).

In particular the compounds of the invention may be useful in thetreatment of VEGFR2-resistant tumours. VEGFR2 inhibitors and antibodiesare used in the treatment of thyroid and renal cell carcinomas,therefore the compounds of the invention may be useful in the treatmentof VEGFR2-resistant thyroid and renal cell carcinomas.

The cancers may be cancers which are sensitive to inhibition of any oneor more FGFRs selected from FGFR1, FGFR2, FGFR3, FGFR4, for example, oneor more FGFRs selected from FGFR1, FGFR2 or FGFR3.

Whether or not a particular cancer is one which is sensitive toinhibition of FGFR or VEGFR signalling may be determined by means of acell growth assay as set out below or by a method as set out in thesection headed “Methods of Diagnosis”.

The compounds of the invention, and in particular those compounds havingFGFR, or VEGFR inhibitory activity, may be particularly useful in thetreatment or prevention of cancers of a type associated with orcharacterised by the presence of elevated levels of FGFR, or VEGFR, forexample the cancers referred to in this context in the introductorysection of this application.

The compounds of the present invention may be useful for the treatmentof the adult population. The compounds of the present invention may beuseful for the treatment of the pediatric population.

It has been discovered that some FGFR inhibitors can be used incombination with other anticancer agents. For example, it may bebeneficial to combine an inhibitor that induces apoptosis with anotheragent which acts via a different mechanism to regulate cell growth thustreating two of the characteristic features of cancer development.Examples of such combinations are set out below.

The compounds of the invention may be useful in treating otherconditions which result from disorders in proliferation such as type IIor non-insulin dependent diabetes mellitus, autoimmune diseases, headtrauma, stroke, epilepsy, neurodegenerative diseases such asAlzheimer's, motor neurone disease, progressive supranuclear palsy,corticobasal degeneration and Pick's disease for example autoimmunediseases and neurodegenerative diseases.

One sub-group of disease states and conditions that the compounds of theinvention may be useful consists of inflammatory diseases,cardiovascular diseases and wound healing.

FGFR, and VEGFR are also known to play a role in apoptosis,angiogenesis, proliferation, differentiation and transcription andtherefore the compounds of the invention could also be useful in thetreatment of the following diseases other than cancer; chronicinflammatory diseases, for example systemic lupus erythematosus,autoimmune mediated glomerulonephritis, rheumatoid arthritis, psoriasis,inflammatory bowel disease, autoimmune diabetes mellitus, Eczemahypersensitivity reactions, asthma, COPD, rhinitis, and upperrespiratory tract disease; cardiovascular diseases for example cardiachypertrophy, restenosis, atherosclerosis; neurodegenerative disorders,for example Alzheimer's disease, AIDS-related dementia, Parkinson'sdisease, amyotropic lateral sclerosis, retinitis pigmentosa, spinalmuscular atropy and cerebellar degeneration; glomerulonephritis;myelodysplastic syndromes, ischemic injury associated myocardialinfarctions, stroke and reperfusion injury, arrhythmia, atherosclerosis,toxin-induced or alcohol related liver diseases, haematologicaldiseases, for example, chronic anemia and aplastic anemia; degenerativediseases of the musculoskeletal system, for example, osteoporosis andarthritis, aspirin-sensitive rhinosinusitis, cystic fibrosis, multiplesclerosis, kidney diseases and cancer pain.

In addition, mutations of FGFR2 are associated with several severeabnormalities in human skeletal development and thus the compounds ofinvention could be useful in the treatment of abnormalities in humanskeletal development, including abnormal ossification of cranial sutures(craniosynostosis), Apert (AP) syndrome, Crouzon syndrome, Jackson-Weisssyndrome, Beare-Stevenson cutis gyrate syndrome, and Pfeiffer syndrome.

The compound of the invention, having FGFR such as FGFR2 or FGFR3inhibitory activity, may be particularly useful in the treatment orprevention of the skeletal diseases. Particular skeletal diseases areachondroplasia or thanatophoric dwarfism (also known as thanatophoricdysplasia).

The compound of the invention, having FGFR such as FGFR1, FGFR2 or FGFR3inhibitory activity, may be particularly useful in the treatment orprevention in pathologies in which progressive fibrosis is a symptom.Fibrotic conditions in which the compounds of the inventions may beuseful in the treatment of include diseases exhibiting abnormal orexcessive deposition of fibrous tissue for example in liver cirrhosis,glomerulonephritis, pulmonary fibrosis, systemic fibrosis, rheumatoidarthritis, as well as the natural process of wound healing. Inparticular the compounds of the inventions may also be useful in thetreatment of lung fibrosis in particular in idiopathic pulmonaryfibrosis.

The over-expression and activation of FGFR and VEGFR in tumor-associatedvasculature has also suggested a role for compounds of the invention inpreventing and disrupting initiation of tumor angiogenesis. Inparticular the compounds of the invention may be useful in the treatmentof cancer, metastasis, leukemia's such as CLL, ocular diseases such asage-related macular degeneration in particular wet form of age-relatedmacular degeneration, ischemic proliferative retinopathies such asretinopathy of prematurity (ROP) and diabetic retinopathy, rheumatoidarthritis and hemangioma.

The activity of the compounds of the invention as inhibitors of FGFR1-4,VEGFR and/or PDGFR A/B can be measured using the assays set forth in theexamples below and the level of activity exhibited by a given compoundcan be defined in terms of the IC₅₀ value. Preferred compounds of thepresent invention are compounds having an IC₅₀ value of less than 1 μM,more preferably less than 0.1 μM.

The invention provides compounds that have FGFR inhibiting or modulatingactivity, and which may be useful in preventing or treating diseasestates or conditions mediated by FGFR kinases.

In one embodiment, there is provided a compound as defined herein foruse in therapy, for use as a medicine. In a further embodiment, there isprovided a compound as defined herein for use in the prophylaxis ortreatment, in particular in the treatment, of a disease state orcondition mediated by a FGFR kinase.

Thus, for example, the compounds of the invention may be useful inalleviating or reducing the incidence of cancer. Therefore, in a furtherembodiment, there is provided a compound as defined herein for use inthe prophylaxis or treatment, in particular the treatment, of cancer. Inone embodiment, the compound as defined herein is for use in theprophylaxis or treatment of FGFR-dependent cancer. In one embodiment,the compound as defined herein is for use in the prophylaxis ortreatment of cancer mediated by FGFR kinases.

Accordingly, the invention provides inter alia:

-   -   A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or        condition mediated by a FGFR kinase, which method comprises        administering to a subject in need thereof a compound of the        formula (I) as defined herein.    -   A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease state or        condition as described herein, which method comprises        administering to a subject in need thereof a compound of the        formula (I) as defined herein.    -   A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, which        method comprises administering to a subject in need thereof a        compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.    -   A method for alleviating or reducing the incidence of a disease        state or condition mediated by a FGFR kinase, which method        comprises administering to a subject in need thereof a compound        of the formula (I) as defined herein.    -   A method of inhibiting a FGFR kinase, which method comprises        contacting the kinase with a kinase-inhibiting compound of the        formula (I) as defined herein.    -   A method of modulating a cellular process (for example cell        division) by inhibiting the activity of a FGFR kinase using a        compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.    -   A compound of formula (I) as defined herein for use as a        modulator of a cellular process (for example cell division) by        inhibiting the activity of a FGFR kinase.    -   A compound of formula (I) as defined herein for use in the        prophylaxis or treatment of cancer, in particular the treatment        of cancer.    -   A compound of formula (I) as defined herein for use as a        modulator (e.g. inhibitor) of FGFR.    -   The use of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein for the        manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of        a disease state or condition mediated by a FGFR kinase, the        compound having the formula (I) as defined herein.    -   The use of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein for the        manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment of        a disease state or condition as described herein.    -   The use of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein for the        manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment, in        particular the treatment, of cancer.    -   The use of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein for the        manufacture of a medicament for modulating (e.g. inhibiting) the        activity of FGFR.    -   Use of a compound of formula (I) as defined herein in the        manufacture of a medicament for modulating a cellular process        (for example cell division) by inhibiting the activity of a FGFR        kinase.    -   The use of a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein for        the manufacture of a medicament for prophylaxis or treatment of        a disease or condition characterised by up-regulation of a FGFR        kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4).    -   The use of a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein for        the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment        of a cancer, the cancer being one which is characterised by        up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or        FGFR4).    -   The use of a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein for        the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment        of cancer in a patient selected from a sub-population possessing        a genetic aberrations of FGFR3 kinase.    -   The use of a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein for        the manufacture of a medicament for the prophylaxis or treatment        of cancer in a patient who has been diagnosed as forming part of        a sub-population possessing a genetic aberrations of FGFR3        kinase.    -   A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of a disease or        condition characterised by up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g.        FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4), the method comprising        administering a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.    -   A method for alleviating or reducing the incidence of a disease        or condition characterised by up-regulation of a FGFR kinase        (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4), the method comprising        administering a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein.    -   A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of (or alleviating or        reducing the incidence of) cancer in a patient suffering from or        suspected of suffering from cancer; which method comprises (i)        subjecting a patient to a diagnostic test to determine whether        the patient possesses a genetic aberrations of FGFR3 gene;        and (ii) where the patient does possess the said variant,        thereafter administering to the patient a compound of the        formula (I) as defined herein having FGFR3 kinase inhibiting        activity.    -   A method for the prophylaxis or treatment of (or alleviating or        reducing the incidence of) a disease state or condition        characterised by up-regulation of an FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or        FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4); which method comprises (i) subjecting        a patient to a diagnostic test to detect a marker characteristic        of up-regulation of a FGFR kinase (e.g. FGFR1 or FGFR2 or FGFR3        or FGFR4) and (ii) where the diagnostic test is indicative of        up-regulation of a FGFR kinase, thereafter administering to the        patient a compound of the formula (I) as defined herein having        FGFR kinase inhibiting activity.

In one embodiment, the disease mediated by FGFR kinases is a oncologyrelated disease (e.g. cancer). In one embodiment, the disease mediatedby FGFR kinases is a non-oncology related disease (e.g. any diseasedisclosed herein excluding cancer). In one embodiment the diseasemediated by FGFR kinases is a condition described herein. In oneembodiment the disease mediated by FGFR kinases is a skeletal conditiondescribed herein. Particular abnormalities in human skeletaldevelopment, include abnormal ossification of cranial sutures(craniosynostosis), Apert (AP) syndrome, Crouzon syndrome, Jackson-Weisssyndrome, Beare-Stevenson cutis gyrate syndrome, Pfeiffer syndrome,achondroplasia and thanatophoric dwarfism (also known as thanatophoricdysplasia).

Mutated Kinases

Drug resistant kinase mutations can arise in patient populations treatedwith kinase inhibitors. These occur, in part, in the regions of theprotein that bind to or interact with the particular inhibitor used intherapy. Such mutations reduce or increase the capacity of the inhibitorto bind to and inhibit the kinase in question. This can occur at any ofthe amino acid residues which interact with the inhibitor or areimportant for supporting the binding of said inhibitor to the target. Aninhibitor that binds to a target kinase without requiring theinteraction with the mutated amino acid residue will likely beunaffected by the mutation and will remain an effective inhibitor of theenzyme.

A study in gastric cancer patient samples showed the presence of twomutations in FGFR2, Ser167Pro in exon IIIa and a splice site mutation940-2A-G in exon IIIc. These mutations are identical to the germlineactivating mutations that cause craniosynotosis syndromes and wereobserved in 13% of primary gastric cancer tissues studied. In additionactivating mutations in FGFR3 were observed in 5% of the patient samplestested and overexpression of FGFRs has been correlated with a poorprognosis in this patient group.

In addition there are chromosomal translocations or point mutations thathave been observed in FGFR which give rise to gain-of-function,over-expressed, or constitutively active biological states.

The compounds of the invention would therefore find particularapplication in relation to cancers which express a mutated moleculartarget such as FGFR. Diagnosis of tumours with such mutations could beperformed using techniques known to a person skilled in the art and asdescribed herein such as RTPCR and FISH.

It has been suggested that mutations of a conserved threonine residue atthe ATP binding site of FGFR would result in inhibitor resistance. Theamino acid valine 561 has been mutated to a methionine in FGFR1 whichcorresponds to previously reported mutations found in Abl (T315) andEGFR (T766) that have been shown to confer resistance to selectiveinhibitors. Assay data for FGFR1 V561M showed that this mutationconferred resistance to a tyrosine kinase inhibitor compared to that ofthe wild type.

Methods of Diagnosis

Prior to administration of a compound of the formula (I), a patient maybe screened to determine whether a disease or condition from which thepatient is or may be suffering is one which would be susceptible totreatment with a compound having activity against FGFR, and/or VEGFR.

For example, a biological sample taken from a patient may be analysed todetermine whether a condition or disease, such as cancer, that thepatient is or may be suffering from is one which is characterised by agenetic abnormality or abnormal protein expression which leads toup-regulation of the levels or activity of FGFR, and/or VEGFR or tosensitisation of a pathway to normal FGFR, and/or VEGFR activity, or toupregulation of these growth factor signalling pathways such as growthfactor ligand levels or growth factor ligand activity or to upregulationof a biochemical pathway downstream of FGFR, and/or VEGFR activation.

Examples of such abnormalities that result in activation orsensitisation of the FGFR, and/or VEGFR signal include loss of, orinhibition of apoptotic pathways, up-regulation of the receptors orligands, or presence of mutant variants of the receptors or ligands e.gPTK variants. Tumours with mutants of FGFR1, FGFR2 or FGFR3 or FGFR4 orup-regulation, in particular over-expression of FGFR1, orgain-of-function mutants of FGFR2 or FGFR3 may be particularly sensitiveto FGFR inhibitors.

For example, point mutations engendering gain-of-function in FGFR2 havebeen identified in a number of conditions. In particular activatingmutations in FGFR2 have been identified in 10% of endometrial tumours.

In addition, genetic aberrations of the FGFR3 receptor tyrosine kinasesuch as chromosomal translocations or point mutations resulting inectopically expressed or deregulated, constitutively active, FGFR3receptors have been identified and are linked to a subset of multiplemyelomas, bladder and cervical carcinomas. A particular mutation T6741of the PDGF receptor has been identified in imatinib-treated patients.In addition, a gene amplification of 8p12-p11.2 was demonstrated in 50%of lobular breast cancer (CLC) cases and this was shown to be linkedwith an increased expression of FGFR1. Preliminary studies with siRNAdirected against FGFR1, or a small molecule inhibitor of the receptor,showed cell lines harbouring this amplification to be particularlysensitive to inhibition of this signalling pathway.

Alternatively, a biological sample taken from a patient may be analysedfor loss of a negative regulator or suppressor of FGFR or VEGFR. In thepresent context, the term “loss” embraces the deletion of a geneencoding the regulator or suppressor, the truncation of the gene (forexample by mutation), the truncation of the transcribed product of thegene, or the inactivation of the transcribed product (e.g. by pointmutation) or sequestration by another gene product.

The term up-regulation includes elevated expression or over-expression,including gene amplification (i.e. multiple gene copies) and increasedexpression by a transcriptional effect, and hyperactivity andactivation, including activation by mutations. Thus, the patient may besubjected to a diagnostic test to detect a marker characteristic ofup-regulation of FGFR, and/or VEGFR. The term diagnosis includesscreening. By marker we include genetic markers including, for example,the measurement of DNA composition to identify mutations of FGFR, and/orVEGFR. The term marker also includes markers which are characteristic ofup regulation of FGFR and/or VEGFR, including enzyme activity, enzymelevels, enzyme state (e.g. phosphorylated or not) and mRNA levels of theaforementioned proteins.

The diagnostic tests and screens are typically conducted on a biologicalsample selected from tumour biopsy samples, blood samples (isolation andenrichment of shed tumour cells), stool biopsies, sputum, chromosomeanalysis, pleural fluid, peritoneal fluid, buccal spears, biopsy orurine.

Methods of identification and analysis of mutations and up-regulation ofproteins are known to a person skilled in the art. Screening methodscould include, but are not limited to, standard methods such asreverse-transcriptase polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR) or in-situhybridization such as fluorescence in situ hybridization (FISH).

Identification of an individual carrying a mutation in FGFR, and/orVEGFR may mean that the patient would be particularly suitable fortreatment with a FGFR, and/or VEGFR inhibitor. Tumours maypreferentially be screened for presence of a FGFR, and/or VEGFR variantprior to treatment. The screening process will typically involve directsequencing, oligonucleotide microarray analysis, or a mutant specificantibody. In addition, diagnosis of tumours with such mutations could beperformed using techniques known to a person skilled in the art and asdescribed herein such as RT-PCR and FISH.

In addition, mutant forms of, for example FGFR or VEGFR2, can beidentified by direct sequencing of, for example, tumour biopsies usingPCR and methods to sequence PCR products directly as hereinbeforedescribed. The skilled artisan will recognize that all such well-knowntechniques for detection of the over expression, activation or mutationsof the aforementioned proteins could be applicable in the present case.

In screening by RT-PCR, the level of mRNA in the tumour is assessed bycreating a cDNA copy of the mRNA followed by amplification of the cDNAby PCR. Methods of PCR amplification, the selection of primers, andconditions for amplification, are known to a person skilled in the art.Nucleic acid manipulations and PCR are carried out by standard methods,as described for example in Ausubel, F. M. et al., eds. (2004) CurrentProtocols in Molecular Biology, John Wiley & Sons Inc., or Innis, M. A.et al., eds. (1990) PCR Protocols: a guide to methods and applications,Academic Press, San Diego. Reactions and manipulations involving nucleicacid techniques are also described in Sambrook et al., (2001), 3^(rd)Ed, Molecular Cloning: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring HarborLaboratory Press. Alternatively a commercially available kit for RT-PCR(for example Roche Molecular Biochemicals) may be used, or methodologyas set forth in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,666,828; 4,683,202; 4,801,531;5,192,659, 5,272,057, 5,882,864, and 6,218,529 and incorporated hereinby reference. An example of an in-situ hybridisation technique forassessing mRNA expression would be fluorescence in-situ hybridisation(FISH) (see Angerer (1987) Meth. Enzymol., 152: 649).

Generally, in situ hybridization comprises the following major steps:(1) fixation of tissue to be analyzed; (2) prehybridization treatment ofthe sample to increase accessibility of target nucleic acid, and toreduce nonspecific binding; (3) hybridization of the mixture of nucleicacids to the nucleic acid in the biological structure or tissue; (4)post-hybridization washes to remove nucleic acid fragments not bound inthe hybridization, and (5) detection of the hybridized nucleic acidfragments. The probes used in such applications are typically labelled,for example, with radioisotopes or fluorescent reporters. Preferredprobes are sufficiently long, for example, from about 50, 100, or 200nucleotides to about 1000 or more nucleotides, to enable specifichybridization with the target nucleic acid(s) under stringentconditions. Standard methods for carrying out FISH are described inAusubel, F. M. et al., eds. (2004) Current Protocols in MolecularBiology, John Wiley & Sons Inc and Fluorescence In Situ Hybridization:Technical Overview by John M. S. Bartlett in Molecular Diagnosis ofCancer, Methods and Protocols, 2nd ed.; ISBN: 1-59259-760-2; March 2004,pps. 077-088; Series: Methods in Molecular Medicine.

Methods for gene expression profiling are described by (DePrimo et al.(2003), BMC Cancer, 3:3). Briefly, the protocol is as follows:double-stranded cDNA is synthesized from total RNA Using a (dT)24oligomer for priming first-strand cDNA synthesis, followed by secondstrand cDNA synthesis with random hexamer primers. The double-strandedcDNA is used as a template for in vitro transcription of cRNA usingbiotinylated ribonucleotides. cRNA is chemically fragmented according toprotocols described by Affymetrix (Santa Clara, Calif., USA), and thenhybridized overnight on Human Genome Arrays.

Alternatively, the protein products expressed from the mRNAs may beassayed by immunohistochemistry of tumour samples, solid phaseimmunoassay with microtitre plates, Western blotting, 2-dimensionalSDS-polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis, ELISA, flow cytometry and othermethods known in the art for detection of specific proteins. Detectionmethods would include the use of site specific antibodies. The skilledperson will recognize that all such well-known techniques for detectionof upregulation of FGFR, and/or VEGFR, or detection of FGFR, and/orVEGFR variants or mutants could be applicable in the present case.

Abnormal levels of proteins such as FGFR or VEGFR can be measured usingstandard enzyme assays, for example, those assays described herein.Activation or overexpression could also be detected in a tissue sample,for example, a tumour tissue. By measuring the tyrosine kinase activitywith an assay such as that from Chemicon International. The tyrosinekinase of interest would be immunoprecipitated from the sample lysateand its activity measured.

Alternative methods for the measurement of the over expression oractivation of FGFR or VEGFR including the isoforms thereof, include themeasurement of microvessel density. This can for example be measuredusing methods described by Orre and Rogers (Int J Cancer (1999), 84(2)101-8). Assay methods also include the use of markers, for example, inthe case of VEGFR these include CD31, CD34 and CD105. Therefore all ofthese techniques could also be used to identify tumours particularlysuitable for treatment with the compounds of the invention.

The compounds of the invention are particular useful in treatment of apatient having a mutated FGFR. The G697C mutation in FGFR3 is observedin 62% of oral squamous cell carcmonas and causes constitutiveactivation of the kinase activity. Activating mutations of FGFR3 havealso been identified in bladder carcinoma cases. These mutations were of6 kinds with varying degrees of prevelence: R248C, S249C, G372C, S373C,Y375C, K652Q. In addition, a Gly388Arg polymorphism in FGFR4 has beenfound to be associated with increased incidence and aggressiveness ofprostate, colon, lung, liver (HCC) and breast cancer.

Therefore in a further aspect the invention includes use of a compoundaccording to the invention for the manufacture of a medicament for thetreatment or prophylaxis of a disease state or condition in a patientwho has been screened and has been determined as suffering from, orbeing at risk of suffering from, a disease or condition which would besusceptible to treatment with a compound having activity against FGFR.

Particular mutations a patient is screened for include G697C, R248C,S249C, G372C, S373C, Y375C, K652Q mutations in FGFR3 and Gly388Argpolymorphism in FGFR4.

In another aspect the invention includes a compound of the invention foruse in the prophylaxis or treatment of cancer in a patient selected froma sub-population possessing a variant of the FGFR gene (for exampleG697C mutation in FGFR3 and Gly388Arg polymorphism in FGFR4).

MRI determination of vessel normalization (e.g. using MRI gradient echo,spin echo, and contrast enhancement to measure blood volume, relativevessel size, and vascular permeability) in combination with circulatingbiomarkers (circulating progenitor cells (CPCs), CECs, SDF1, and FGF2)may also be used to identify VEGFR2-resistant tumours for treatment witha compound of the invention.

Pharmaceutical Compositions and Combinations

In view of their useful pharmacological properties, the subjectcompounds may be formulated into various pharmaceutical forms foradministration purposes.

In one embodiment the pharmaceutical composition (e.g. formulation)comprises at least one active compound of the invention together withone or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers, adjuvants, excipients,diluents, fillers, buffers, stabilisers, preservatives, lubricants, orother materials well known to those skilled in the art and optionallyother therapeutic or prophylactic agents.

To prepare the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention, aneffective amount of a compound of the present invention, as the activeingredient is combined in intimate admixture with a pharmaceuticallyacceptable carrier, which carrier may take a wide variety of formsdepending on the form of preparation desired for administration. Thepharmaceutical compositions can be in any form suitable for oral,parenteral, topical, intranasal, ophthalmic, otic, rectal,intra-vaginal, or transdermal administration. These pharmaceuticalcompositions are desirably in unitary dosage form suitable, preferably,for administration orally, rectally, percutaneously, or by parenteralinjection. For example, in preparing the compositions in oral dosageform, any of the usual pharmaceutical media may be employed, such as,for example, water, glycols, oils, alcohols and the like in the case oforal liquid preparations such as suspensions, syrups, elixirs andsolutions; or solid carriers such as starches, sugars, kaolin,lubricants, binders, disintegrating agents and the like in the case ofpowders, pills, capsules and tablets.

Because of their ease in administration, tablets and capsules representthe most advantageous oral dosage unit form, in which case solidpharmaceutical carriers are obviously employed. For parenteralcompositions, the carrier will usually comprise sterile water, at leastin large part, though other ingredients, to aid solubility for example,may be included. Injectable solutions, for example, may be prepared inwhich the carrier comprises saline solution, glucose solution or amixture of saline and glucose solution. Injectable suspensions may alsobe prepared in which case appropriate liquid carriers, suspending agentsand the like may be employed. In the compositions suitable forpercutaneous administration, the carrier optionally comprises apenetration enhancing agent and/or a suitable wetting agent, optionallycombined with suitable additives of any nature in minor proportions,which additives do not cause a significant deleterious effect to theskin. Said additives may facilitate the administration to the skinand/or may be helpful for preparing the desired compositions. Thesecompositions may be administered in various ways, e.g., as a transdermalpatch, as a spot-on, as an ointment. It is especially advantageous toformulate the aforementioned pharmaceutical compositions in dosage unitform for ease of administration and uniformity of dosage. Dosage unitform as used in the specification and claims herein refers to physicallydiscrete units suitable as unitary dosages, each unit containing apredetermined quantity of active ingredient calculated to produce thedesired therapeutic effect in association with the requiredpharmaceutical carrier. Examples of such dosage unit forms are tablets(including scored or coated tablets), capsules, pills, powder packets,wafers, injectable solutions or suspensions, teaspoonfuls,tablespoonfuls and the like, and segregated multiples thereof.

It is especially advantageous to formulate the aforementionedpharmaceutical compositions in dosage unit form for ease ofadministration and uniformity of dosage. Dosage unit form as used in thespecification and claims herein refers to physically discrete unitssuitable as unitary dosages, each unit containing a predeterminedquantity of active ingredient, calculated to produce the desiredtherapeutic effect, in association with the required pharmaceuticalcarrier. Examples of such dosage unit forms are tablets (includingscored or coated tablets), capsules, pills, powder packets, wafers,injectable solutions or suspensions, teaspoonfuls, tablespoonfuls andthe like, and segregated multiples thereof.

The compound of the invention is administered in an amount sufficient toexert its anti-tumour activity.

Those skilled in the art could easily determine the effective amountfrom the test results presented hereinafter. In general it iscontemplated that a therapeutically effective amount would be from 0.005mg/kg to 100 mg/kg body weight, and in particular from 0.005 mg/kg to 10mg/kg body weight. It may be appropriate to administer the required doseas single, two, three, four or more sub-doses at appropriate intervalsthroughout the day. Said sub-doses may be formulated as unit dosageforms, for example, containing 0.5 to 500 mg, in particular 1 mg to 500mg, more in particular 10 mg to 500 mg of active ingredient per unitdosage form.

Depending on the mode of administration, the pharmaceutical compositionwill preferably comprise from 0.05 to 99% by weight, more preferablyfrom 0.1 to 70% by weight, even more preferably from 0.1 to 50% byweight of the compound of the present invention, and, from 1 to 99.95%by weight, more preferably from 30 to 99.9% by weight, even morepreferably from 50 to 99.9% by weight of a pharmaceutically acceptablecarrier, all percentages being based on the total weight of thecomposition.

As another aspect of the present invention, a combination of a compoundof the present invention with another anticancer agent is envisaged,especially for use as a medicine, more specifically for use in thetreatment of cancer or related diseases.

For the treatment of the above conditions, the compounds of theinvention may be advantageously employed in combination with one or moreother medicinal agents, more particularly, with other anti-cancer agentsor adjuvants in cancer therapy. Examples of anti-cancer agents oradjuvants (supporting agents in the therapy) include but are not limitedto:

-   -   platinum coordination compounds for example cisplatin optionally        combined with amifostine, carboplatin or oxaliplatin;    -   taxane compounds for example paclitaxel, paclitaxel protein        bound particles (Abraxane™) or docetaxel;    -   topoisomerase I inhibitors such as camptothecin compounds for        example irinotecan, SN-38, topotecan, topotecan hcl;    -   topoisomerase II inhibitors such as anti-tumour        epipodophyllotoxins or podophyllotoxin derivatives for example        etoposide, etoposide phosphate or teniposide;    -   anti-tumour vinca alkaloids for example vinblastine, vincristine        or vinorelbine;    -   anti-tumour nucleoside derivatives for example 5-fluorouracil,        leucovorin, gemcitabine, gemcitabine hcl, capecitabine,        cladribine, fludarabine, nelarabine;    -   alkylating agents such as nitrogen mustard or nitrosourea for        example cyclophosphamide, chlorambucil, carmustine, thiotepa,        mephalan (melphalan), lomustine, altretamine, busulfan,        dacarbazine, estramustine, ifosfamide optionally in combination        with mesna, pipobroman, procarbazine, streptozocin,        telozolomide, uracil;    -   anti-tumour anthracycline derivatives for example daunorubicin,        doxorubicin optionally in combination with dexrazoxane, doxil,        idarubicin, mitoxantrone, epirubicin, epirubicin hcl,        valrubicin;    -   molecules that target the IGF-1 receptor for example        picropodophilin;    -   tetracarcin derivatives for example tetrocarcin A;    -   glucocorticoiden for example prednisone;    -   antibodies for example trastuzumab (HER2 antibody), rituximab        (CD20 antibody), gemtuzumab, gemtuzumab ozogamicin, cetuximab,        pertuzumab, bevacizumab, alemtuzumab, eculizumab, ibritumomab        tiuxetan, nofetumomab, panitumumab, tositumomab, CNTO 328;    -   estrogen receptor antagonists or selective estrogen receptor        modulators or inhibitors of estrogen synthesis for example        tamoxifen, fulvestrant, toremifene, droloxifene, faslodex,        raloxifene or letrozole;    -   aromatase inhibitors such as exemestane, anastrozole, letrazole,        testolactone and vorozole;    -   differentiating agents such as retinoids, vitamin D or retinoic        acid and retinoic acid metabolism blocking agents (RAMBA) for        example accutane;    -   DNA methyl transferase inhibitors for example azacytidine or        decitabine;    -   antifolates for example premetrexed disodium;    -   antibiotics for example antinomycin D, bleomycin, mitomycin C,        dactinomycin, carminomycin, daunomycin, levamisole, plicamycin,        mithramycin;    -   antimetabolites for example clofarabine, aminopterin, cytosine        arabinoside or methotrexate, azacitidine, cytarabine,        floxuridine, pentostatin, thioguanine;    -   apoptosis inducing agents and antiangiogenic agents such as        Bcl-2 inhibitors for example YC 137, BH 312, ABT 737, gossypol,        HA 14-1, TW 37 or decanoic acid;    -   tubuline-binding agents for example combrestatin, colchicines or        nocodazole;    -   kinase inhibitors (e.g. EGFR (epithelial growth factor receptor)        inhibitors, MTKI (multi target kinase inhibitors), mTOR        inhibitors) for example flavoperidol, imatinib mesylate,        erlotinib, gefitinib, dasatinib, lapatinib, lapatinib        ditosylate, sorafenib, sunitinib, sunitinib maleate,        temsirolimus;    -   farnesyltransferase inhibitors for example tipifarnib;    -   histone deacetylase (HDAC) inhibitors for example sodium        butyrate, suberoylanilide hydroxamide acid (SAHA), depsipeptide        (FR 901228), NVP-LAQ824, R306465, JNJ-26481585, trichostatin A,        vorinostat;    -   Inhibitors of the ubiquitin-proteasome pathway for example        PS-341, MLN 0.41 or bortezomib;    -   Yondelis;    -   Telomerase inhibitors for example telomestatin;    -   Matrix metalloproteinase inhibitors for example batimastat,        marimastat, prinostat or metastat.    -   Recombinant interleukins for example aldesleukin, denileukin        diftitox, interferon alfa 2a, interferon alfa 2b, peginterferon        alfa 2b    -   MAPK inhibitors    -   Retinoids for example alitretinoin, bexarotene, tretinoin    -   Arsenic trioxide    -   Asparaginase    -   Steroids for example dromostanolone propionate, megestrol        acetate, nandrolone (decanoate, phenpropionate), dexamethasone    -   Gonadotropin releasing hormone agonists or antagonists for        example abarelix, goserelin acetate, histrelin acetate,        leuprolide acetate    -   Thalidomide, lenalidomide    -   Mercaptopurine, mitotane, pamidronate, pegademase, pegaspargase,        rasburicase    -   BH3 mimetics for example ABT-737    -   MEK inhibitors for example PD98059, AZD6244, CI-1040    -   colony-stimulating factor analogs for example filgrastim,        pegfilgrastim, sargramostim; erythropoietin or analogues thereof        (e.g. darbepoetin alfa); interleukin 11; oprelvekin;        zoledronate, zoledronic acid; fentanyl;    -   bisphosphonate; palifermin.    -   a steroidal cytochrome P450 17alpha-hydroxylase-17,20-lyase        inhibitor (CYP17), e.g. abiraterone, abiraterone acetate.

The compounds of the present invention also have therapeuticapplications in sensitising tumour cells for radiotherapy andchemotherapy.

Hence the compounds of the present invention can be used as“radiosensitizer” and/or “chemosensitizer” or can be given incombination with another “radiosensitizer” and/or “chemosensitizer”.

The term “radiosensitizer”, as used herein, is defined as a molecule,preferably a low molecular weight molecule, administered to animals intherapeutically effective amounts to increase the sensitivity of thecells to ionizing radiation and/or to promote the treatment of diseaseswhich are treatable with ionizing radiation.

The term “chemosensitizer”, as used herein, is defined as a molecule,preferably a low molecular weight molecule, administered to animals intherapeutically effective amounts to increase the sensitivity of cellsto chemotherapy and/or promote the treatment of diseases which aretreatable with chemotherapeutics.

Several mechanisms for the mode of action of radiosensitizers have beensuggested in the literature including: hypoxic cell radiosensitizers(e.g., 2-nitroimidazole compounds, and benzotriazine dioxide compounds)mimicking oxygen or alternatively behave like bioreductive agents underhypoxia; non-hypoxic cell radiosensitizers (e.g., halogenatedpyrimidines) can be analogoues of DNA bases and preferentiallyincorporate into the DNA of cancer cells and thereby promote theradiation-induced breaking of DNA molecules and/or prevent the normalDNA repair mechanisms; and various other potential mechanisms of actionhave been hypothesized for radiosensitizers in the treatment of disease.

Many cancer treatment protocols currently employ radiosensitizers inconjunction with radiation of x-rays. Examples of x-ray activatedradiosensitizers include, but are not limited to, the following:metronidazole, misonidazole, desmethylmisonidazole, pimonidazole,etanidazole, nimorazole, mitomycin C, RSU 1069, SR 4233, E09, RB 6145,nicotinamide, 5-bromodeoxyuridine (BUdR), 5-iododeoxyuridine (IUdR),bromodeoxycytidine, fluorodeoxyuridine (FudR), hydroxyurea, cisplatin,and therapeutically effective analogs and derivatives of the same.

Photodynamic therapy (PDT) of cancers employs visible light as theradiation activator of the sensitizing agent. Examples of photodynamicradiosensitizers include the following, but are not limited to:hematoporphyrin derivatives, Photofrin, benzoporphyrin derivatives, tinetioporphyrin, pheoborbide-a, bacteriochlorophyll-a, naphthalocyanines,phthalocyanines, zinc phthalocyanine, and therapeutically effectiveanalogs and derivatives of the same.

Radiosensitizers may be administered in conjunction with atherapeutically effective amount of one or more other compounds,including but not limited to: compounds which promote the incorporationof radiosensitizers to the target cells; compounds which control theflow of therapeutics, nutrients, and/or oxygen to the target cells;chemotherapeutic agents which act on the tumour with or withoutadditional radiation; or other therapeutically effective compounds fortreating cancer or other diseases.

Chemosensitizers may be administered in conjunction with atherapeutically effective amount of one or more other compounds,including but not limited to: compounds which promote the incorporationof chemosensitizers to the target cells; compounds which control theflow of therapeutics, nutrients, and/or oxygen to the target cells;chemotherapeutic agents which act on the tumour or other therapeuticallyeffective compounds for treating cancer or other disease. Calciumantagonists, for example verapamil, are found useful in combination withantineoplastic agents to establish chemosensitivity in tumor cellsresistant to accepted chemotherapeutic agents and to potentiate theefficacy of such compounds in drug-sensitive malignancies.

In view of their useful pharmacological properties, the components ofthe combinations according to the invention, i.e. the one or more othermedicinal agent and the compound according to the present invention maybe formulated into various pharmaceutical forms for administrationpurposes. The components may be formulated separately in individualpharmaceutical compositions or in a unitary pharmaceutical compositioncontaining all components.

The present invention therefore also relates to a pharmaceuticalcomposition comprising the one or more other medicinal agent and thecompound according to the present invention together with apharmaceutical carrier.

The present invention further relates to the use of a combinationaccording to the invention in the manufacture of a pharmaceuticalcomposition for inhibiting the growth of tumour cells.

The present invention further relates to a product containing as firstactive ingredient a compound according to the invention and as furtheractive ingredient one or more anticancer agent, as a combinedpreparation for simultaneous, separate or sequential use in thetreatment of patients suffering from cancer.

The one or more other medicinal agents and the compound according to thepresent invention may be administered simultaneously (e.g. in separateor unitary compositions) or sequentially in either order. In the lattercase, the two or more compounds will be administered within a period andin an amount and manner that is sufficient to ensure that anadvantageous or synergistic effect is achieved. It will be appreciatedthat the preferred method and order of administration and the respectivedosage amounts and regimes for each component of the combination willdepend on the particular other medicinal agent and compound of thepresent invention being administered, their route of administration, theparticular tumour being treated and the particular host being treated.The optimum method and order of administration and the dosage amountsand regime can be readily determined by those skilled in the art usingconventional methods and in view of the information set out herein.

The weight ratio of the compound according to the present invention andthe one or more other anticancer agent(s) when given as a combinationmay be determined by the person skilled in the art. Said ratio and theexact dosage and frequency of administration depends on the particularcompound according to the invention and the other anticancer agent(s)used, the particular condition being treated, the severity of thecondition being treated, the age, weight, gender, diet, time ofadministration and general physical condition of the particular patient,the mode of administration as well as other medication the individualmay be taking, as is well known to those skilled in the art.Furthermore, it is evident that the effective daily amount may belowered or increased depending on the response of the treated subjectand/or depending on the evaluation of the physician prescribing thecompounds of the instant invention. A particular weight ratio for thepresent compound of formula (I) and another anticancer agent may rangefrom 1/10 to 10/1, more in particular from 1/5 to 5/1, even more inparticular from 1/3 to 3/1.

The platinum coordination compound is advantageously administered in adosage of 1 to 500 mg per square meter (mg/m²) of body surface area, forexample 50 to 400 mg/m², particularly for cisplatin in a dosage of about75 mg/m² and for carboplatin in about 300 mg/m² per course of treatment.

The taxane compound is advantageously administered in a dosage of 50 to400 mg per square meter (mg/m²) of body surface area, for example 75 to250 mg/m², particularly for paclitaxel in a dosage of about 175 to 250mg/m² and for docetaxel in about 75 to 150 mg/m² per course oftreatment.

The camptothecin compound is advantageously administered in a dosage of0.1 to 400 mg per square meter (mg/m²) of body surface area, for example1 to 300 mg/m², particularly for irinotecan in a dosage of about 100 to350 mg/m² and for topotecan in about 1 to 2 mg/m² per course oftreatment.

The anti-tumour podophyllotoxin derivative is advantageouslyadministered in a dosage of 30 to 300 mg per square meter (mg/m²) ofbody surface area, for example 50 to 250 mg/m², particularly foretoposide in a dosage of about 35 to 100 mg/m² and for teniposide inabout 50 to 250 mg/m² per course of treatment.

The anti-tumour vinca alkaloid is advantageously administered in adosage of 2 to 30 mg per square meter (mg/m²) of body surface area,particularly for vinblastine in a dosage of about 3 to 12 mg/m², forvincristine in a dosage of about 1 to 2 mg/m², and for vinorelbine indosage of about 10 to 30 mg/m² per course of treatment.

The anti-tumour nucleoside derivative is advantageously administered ina dosage of 200 to 2500 mg per square meter (mg/m²) of body surfacearea, for example 700 to 1500 mg/m², particularly for 5-FU in a dosageof 200 to 500 mg/m², for gemcitabine in a dosage of about 800 to 1200mg/m² and for capecitabine in about 1000 to 2500 mg/m² per course oftreatment.

The alkylating agents such as nitrogen mustard or nitrosourea isadvantageously administered in a dosage of 100 to 500 mg per squaremeter (mg/m²) of body surface area, for example 120 to 200 mg/m²,particularly for cyclophosphamide in a dosage of about 100 to 500 mg/m²,for chlorambucil in a dosage of about 0.1 to 0.2 mg/kg, for carmustinein a dosage of about 150 to 200 mg/m², and for lomustine in a dosage ofabout 100 to 150 mg/m² per course of treatment.

The anti-tumour anthracycline derivative is advantageously administeredin a dosage of to 75 mg per square meter (mg/m²) of body surface area,for example 15 to 60 mg/m², particularly for doxorubicin in a dosage ofabout 40 to 75 mg/m², for daunorubicin in a dosage of about 25 to 45mg/m², and for idarubicin in a dosage of about 10 to 15 mg/m² per courseof treatment.

The antiestrogen agent is advantageously administered in a dosage ofabout 1 to 100 mg daily depending on the particular agent and thecondition being treated. Tamoxifen is advantageously administered orallyin a dosage of 5 to 50 mg, preferably 10 to 20 mg twice a day,continuing the therapy for sufficient time to achieve and maintain atherapeutic effect. Toremifene is advantageously administered orally ina dosage of about 60 mg once a day, continuing the therapy forsufficient time to achieve and maintain a therapeutic effect.Anastrozole is advantageously administered orally in a dosage of about 1mg once a day. Droloxifene is advantageously administered orally in adosage of about 20-100 mg once a day. Raloxifene is advantageouslyadministered orally in a dosage of about 60 mg once a day. Exemestane isadvantageously administered orally in a dosage of about 25 mg once aday.

Antibodies are advantageously administered in a dosage of about 1 to 5mg per square meter (mg/m²) of body surface area, or as known in theart, if different. Trastuzumab is advantageously administered in adosage of 1 to 5 mg per square meter (mg/m²) of body surface area,particularly 2 to 4 mg/m² per course of treatment.

These dosages may be administered for example once, twice or more percourse of treatment, which may be repeated for example every 7, 14, 21or 28 days.

The compounds of formula (I), the pharmaceutically acceptable additionsalts, in particular pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts,and stereoisomeric forms thereof can have valuable diagnostic propertiesin that they can be used for detecting or identifying the formation of acomplex between a labelled compound and other molecules, peptides,proteins, enzymes or receptors.

The detecting or identifying methods can use compounds that are labelledwith labelling agents such as radioisotopes, enzymes, fluorescentsubstances, luminous substances, etc. Examples of the radioisotopesinclude ¹²⁵I, ¹³¹I, ³H and ¹⁴C. Enzymes are usually made detectable byconjugation of an appropriate substrate which, in turn catalyses adetectable reaction. Examples thereof include, for example,beta-galactosidase, beta-glucosidase, alkaline phosphatase, peroxidaseand malate dehydrogenase, preferably horseradish peroxidase. Theluminous substances include, for example, luminol, luminol derivatives,luciferin, aequorin and luciferase.

Biological samples can be defined as body tissue or body fluids.Examples of body fluids are cerebrospinal fluid, blood, plasma, serum,urine, sputum, saliva and the like.

General Synthetic Routes

The following examples illustrate the present invention but are examplesonly and are not intended to limit the scope of the claims in any way.

Experimental Part

Hereinafter, the term ‘ACN’ or CH₃CN means acetonitrile, ‘DCM’ meansdichloromethane, ‘K₂CO₃’ means potassium carbonate, ‘Cs₂CO₃’ meanscesium carbonate, ‘Na₂CO₃’ means sodium carbonate, ‘MgSO₄’ meansmagnesium sulphate, ‘Na₂SO₄’ means sodium sulphate, ‘MeOH’ or ‘CH₃OH’means methanol, ‘EtOH’ means ethanol, ‘EtOAc’ means ethyl acetate,‘Et₃N’ means triethylamine, ‘THF’ means tetrahydrofuran, ‘NH₄Cl’ meansammonium chloride, ‘NaI’ means sodium iodide, ‘NaOH’ means sodiumhydroxide, ‘NaCl’ means sodium chloride, ‘DMF’ meansN,N-dimethylformamide, ‘NaH’ means sodium hydride, 60% dispersion inmineral oil, ‘Pd(OAc)₂’ means palladium(II) acetate (47% Pd),‘PdCl₂(dppf).CH₂Cl₂’ means1,1′-Bis(diphenylphosphino)ferrocene-palladium(II)dichloridedichloromethane complex, ‘KOH’ means potassium hydroxide, ‘CO₂’ meanscarbon dioxide, ‘Et₂O’ means diethyl ether, ‘DMSO’ means dimethylsulfoxide, ‘HCl’ means hydrochloric acid, ‘SiO₂’ or ‘SiOH’ means silica,‘N₂’ means nitrogen, ‘MP’ means melting point ‘rt’ means roomtemperature, ‘CHCl₃’ means chloroform, ‘POCl₃’ means phosphorusoxychloride, ‘DiPEA’ means N,N-diisopropylethylamine, ‘Ni’ means RaneyNickel, 50% slurry in water ‘NaHCO₃’ means sodium hydrogen carbonate,‘TFA’ means trifluoroacetic acid, ‘DMAP’ means 4-dimethylaminopyridine,‘NaBH₄’ means sodium borohydride, ‘LiCl’ means lithium chloride,‘Ruphos’ means 2-Dicyclohexylphosphino-2′,6′-diisopropoxybiphenyl, ‘pH’means potential hydrogen, ‘H₂’ means hydrogen, ‘AlCl3’ means aluminiumtrichloride, ‘h’ means hour; ‘mn’ means minute; ‘Xantphos’ means4,5-Bis(diphenylphosphino)-9,9-dimethylxanthene, ‘M.P.’ means meltingpoint; ‘DSC’ means differential scanning calorimetry.

Some compounds of the present invention were obtained as salt forms orhydrates or contain some amounts of solvent. Hereinafter, thesecompounds are reported as determined based on elemental analysis.

A. Preparation of the Intermediates

Example A1

a) Preparation of Intermediate 1

Under argon atmosphere, meldrum's acid (108 g, 752 mmol) and triethylorthoformate (108 ml, 651 mmol) were added to a solution of5-amino-2-methoxypyridine (62.2 g, 501 mmol) in ethanol (210 ml). Themixture was stirred at 80° C. for 3 hours and then cooled to roomtemperature and stirred overnight. The precipitate was filtered off,washed with ethanol (2×200 ml) and then was dried to afford 138 g (99%)of intermediate 1, that was used without further purification for thenext step.

b) Preparation of Intermediate 2

Intermediate 1 (13.6 g, 49.6 mmol) was added portionwise to diphenylether (100 ml, 630 mmol) at 220° C. The solution was stirred at refluxfor 10 minutes and then cooled to room temperature. The combinedprecipitated solid were filtered off and washed with diethyl ether(2×500 ml) to give 45.6 g of a pale brown solid. The solid wastriturated in diethyl ether (2×500 ml), filtered off and dried undervacuum to give 44 g (50%) of intermediate 2, that was used withoutfurther purification for the next step.

c) Preparation of Intermediate 3

N-bromosuccinimide (57.8 g, 325 mmol) was added to a solution ofintermediate 2 (44 g, 250 mmol) in acetic acid (800 ml) at roomtemperature. The mixture was stirred for 2 hours, was filtered off andwashed successively with acetic acid (100 ml) and diethyl ether (2×500ml), then dried to give 58.2 g (91%, beige solid) of intermediate 3,that was used without further purification for the next step.

d) Preparation of Intermediate 4

Phosphoryl chloride (213 ml, 2282 mmol) was added to a mixture ofintermediate 3 (58.2 g, 228 mmol) in chloroform (213 ml). The solutionwas refluxed for 3 hours, concentrated till dryness and dried undervacuum. The residual solid was carefully basified with a 1M aqueoussolution of sodium hydroxide (300 ml), diluted with water (300 ml) andextracted with ethyl acetate (6×500 ml). The combined organic layerswere dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated, yielding 54.0g (87%) of intermediate 4 that was used without further purification forthe next step.

e) Preparation of Intermediate 5

A solution of intermediate 4 (31.4 g, 115 mmol),1-Methylpyrazole-4-boronic acid pinacol ester (25.1 g, 121 mmol), sodiumcarbonate (36.5 g, 344 mmol) in a mixture of 1,4-dioxane (400 ml) andwater (120 ml) was degassed and filled with argon (operation repeated 3times). PdCl₂(dppf).CH₂Cl₂ (4.68 g, 5.74 mmol) was added and theresulting mixture was degassed and filled with argon (operation repeatedtwice) and stirred at 110° C. for 16 hours. After cooling to roomtemperature, ethyl acetate (500 ml) and water (500 ml) were added to thereaction mixture. The layers were separated and the aqueous layer wasextracted with ethyl acetate (2×400 ml). The combined organic layerswere dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and evaporated to dryness. Theresidue was sonicated in diethyl ether (500 ml), filtered on glass-frit,washed with diethyl ether (2×200 ml) and dried under vacuum, yielding29.2 g (93%) of intermediate 5.

Analogous preparation of intermediate 22 starting from intermediate 24

Analogous preparation of intermediate 27 starting from intermediate 4

Analogous preparation of intermediate 50 starting from intermediate 4

Analogous preparation of intermediate 56 starting from intermediate 4

Analogous preparation of intermediate 70 starting from intermediate 4

f) Preparation of Intermediate 6

A catalytic amount of Raney Nickel (50% slurry in water, 1.68 g, 28.6mmol) was washed twice with ethanol and collected after decantation.This catalytic amount was added to a solution of intermediate 5 (26.2 g,95.4 mmol) in a mixture of ethanol (700 ml), tetrahydrofuran (500 ml)and 1M in NaOH (114 ml, 114 mmol). The mixture was purged and stirredunder hydrogen atmosphere (1 bar) at 50° C. for 16 hours. An additionalamount of Raney Nickel (50% slurry in water, 1.68 g, 28.6 mmol) wasadded and the reaction mixture was purged and stirred under hydrogenatmosphere (1 bar) at 50° C. for 24 hours. The mixture was cooled toroom temperature, filtered through celite, washed with tetrahydrofuran(500 ml) and concentrated. The residue was triturated in diethyl ether(500 ml), the precipitate was filtered off and washed with diethyl ether(100 ml). The obtained product was adsorbed on silica gel and purifiedby chromatography over silica gel (mobile phase, gradient from 96% DCM,4% MeOH to 94% DCM, 6% MeOH). The product fractions were collected andthe solvent was evaporated, yielding 9.05 g (39%) of intermediate 6.

Analogous preparation of intermediate 21 starting from intermediate 22

Analogous preparation of intermediate 26 starting from intermediate 27

Analogous preparation of intermediate 49 starting from intermediate 50

Analogous preparation of intermediate 55 starting from intermediate 56

Analogous preparation of intermediate 69 starting from intermediate 70

Intermediate 6 was also prepared as follows:

The reaction was performed in parallel in 3 batches (3×21.2 g).

A catalytic amount of Raney Nickel, 50% slurry in water (2.72 g; 46.3mmol) was washed twice with ethanol and collected after decantation.This catalytic amount was added to a solution of intermediate 5 (21.2 g;77.3 mmol) in a mixture of EtOH (400 mL), THF (400 mL) and NaOH 1M (81.3mL; 81.3 mmol). The mixture was purged and stirred under hydrogenatmosphere (1 bar) at 50° C. for 90 hours. The 3 reactions were combinedand the resulting mixture was cooled to room temperature, filteredthrough a pad of Celite®, washed with EtOH (1000 mL), then with THF (300mL) and concentrated. The residue (63.9 g, brown solid) was purifiedseveral times by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent:petroleum ether/ethyl acetate 50/50 to 0/100). The product fractionswere collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 31.2 g (56%, beigesolid) of intermediate 6.

g) Preparation of Intermediate 7

6M aqueous HCl (94 ml, 564 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate6 (9.0 g, 37.6 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (200 ml). The mixture was stirred at80° C. for 3 hours, cooled down to room temperature and concentrated.The residue was suspended in a mixture of water, dichloromethane andmethanol (300 ml; 3/2/1). The mixture was basified with a 3N aqueoussolution of NaOH until pH=9 and the resulting solution was concentrated,yielding 13.7 g (161%) of intermediate 7, which was used without furtherpurification for the next step.

Analogous preparation of intermediate 20 starting from intermediate 21

Analogous preparation of intermediate 25 starting from intermediate 26

Analogous preparation of intermediate 48 starting from intermediate 49

Analogous preparation of intermediate 54 starting from intermediate 55

Analogous preparation of intermediate 68 starting from intermediate 69

Intermediate 7 was also prepared as follows;

Aqueous HCl 6M (44 mL; 266 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate6 (4.26 g; 17.7 mmol) in dioxane (85 mL). The mixture was stirred at 80°C. for 3 hours, cooled to room temperature and quenched with an aqueoussaturated solution of potassium carbonate (300 mL). The precipitatedsolid was filtered off, washed with water (400 mL) and Et₂O (200 mL)affording fraction A (hydrated intermediate 7). The filtrate wasextracted with a 9/1 mixture of CH₂Cl₂/MeOH (4×1 L). Fraction A wasadded to the combined organic layers. The resulting mixture wasevaporated. The residual solid was suspended in methanol andconcentrated to afford 5.22 g of intermediate 7 which was used as suchin the next step.

h) Preparation of Intermediate 8

The reaction was performed under argon.

Phosphoryl chloride (200 ml, 2146 mmol) was added to a suspension ofintermediate 7 (crude 13.7 g, maximum 37.6 mmol) in chloroform (200 ml).The reaction mixture was refluxed for 16 hours, cooled to roomtemperature and concentrated. The residual solid was taken up in amixture of dichloromethane/methanol 95/5 (300 ml), slowly basified at 0°C. with a 3M aqueous solution of sodium hydroxide (60 ml) and dilutedwith water (100 ml). The aqueous layer was extracted with a mixture ofdichloromethane/methanol 95/5 (2×150 ml). The combined organic layerswere dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. The obtainedresidue was dissolved in a mixture of dichloromethane and methanol (400ml; 3/1), adsorbed on silica gel and purified by chromatography oversilica gel (mobile phase, gradient from 97% DCM, 3% MeOH to 95% DCM, 5%MeOH). The product fractions were collected and the solvent wasevaporated, yielding 6.15 g (67%) of intermediate 8, which was usedwithout further purification for the next step.

Analogous preparation of intermediate 19 starting from intermediate 20

Analogous preparation of intermediate 24 starting from intermediate 25

Analogous preparation of intermediate 47 starting from intermediate 48

Analogous preparation of intermediate 53 starting from intermediate 54

Analogous preparation of intermediate 67 starting from intermediate 68

Intermediate 8 was also prepared as follows:

POCl₃ (18.5 mL; 199 mmol) was added to a suspension of intermediate 7(4.5 g; 19.9 mmol) in CHCl₃ (19 mL). The reaction mixture was refluxedfor 3 hours, cooled to room temperature and concentrated. The residualsolid was taken up in a mixture of DCM/MeOH 97/3 (500 mL) and washedwith a 1M aqueous solution of sodium hydroxide (500 mL). The aqueouslayer was extracted with a mixture of DCM/MeOH 97/3 (2×250 mL). Thecombined organic layers were washed with brine, dried over Na₂SO₄,filtered and concentrated to give 3.61 g (74%, yellow solid) ofintermediate 8.

i) Preparation of Intermediate 9

3,5-Dimethoxyaniline (1.25 g, 8.2 mmol) was added to a solution ofintermediate 8 (1.0 g, 4.1 mmol) in 1-propanol (70 ml). The reactionmixture was refluxed for 16 hours. The resulting precipitate wasfiltered off, rinsed with 1-propanol (15 ml), diethylether (20 ml) anddried under vacuum, yielding 1.02 g (69%) of intermediate 9.

The filtrate was concentrated under reduced pressure till dryness. Theresidue was dissolved in a mixture of dichloromethane and methanol (50ml; 4/1) and purified by chromatography over silica gel (mobile phase,gradient from 96% DCM, 4% MeOH to 94% DCM, 6% MeOH). The productfractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated yielding 0.456 g(31%) of intermediate 9.

Analogous preparation of intermediate 18 starting from intermediate 19

Analogous preparation of intermediate 23 starting from intermediate 24

Analogous preparation of intermediate 32 starting from intermediate 8

Analogous preparation of intermediate 33 starting from intermediate 8

Analogous preparation of intermediate 46 starting from intermediate 47

Analogous preparation of intermediate 52 starting from intermediate 53

Analogous preparation of intermediate 66 starting from intermediate 67

Alternative preparation of intermediate 9

The reaction was performed 5 time on same amounts in parallel.

Palladium (II) acetate (0.069 g, 0.1 mmol) was added to a mixture ofintermediate 8 (0.72 g, 2.9 mmol), 3,5-dimethoxyaniline (0.9 g, 5.9mmol), cesium carbonate (4.8 g, 14.7 mmol) and2,2′-bis(diphenylphosphino)-1,1′-binaphthyl (0.366 g, 0.59 mmol) in a50/50 (v/v) mixture of NMP and 1,4-dioxane (15.0 ml). The mixture wasstirred at 150° C. for 30 minutes under microwave irradiation and wasconcentrated. The combined residues of 5 experiments were purified bychromatography over silica gel (mobile phase: gradient from 100% DCM to96% DCM, 4% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and the solventwas evaporated yielding 4.57 g (86%) of crude intermediate 9. A sample(0.4 g) was purified by chromatography over silica gel (mobile phase:gradient from 100% DCM to 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The desired fractions werecollected and the solvent was evaporated. to afford 0.187 g green solid(MP: 229-230° C.)

Example A2

Preparation of Intermediate 10

The reaction was performed in anhydrous conditions under argonatmosphere. NaH (60% in mineral oil, 0.332 g, 8.30 mmol) was added to asolution of intermediate 9 (2.0 g, 5.5 mmol) in dimethylformamide (50ml) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 40 minutes, then(2-bromoethoxy)-tert-butyl-dimethylsilane (1.78 ml, 8.3 mmol) was addedat 0° C. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 hour and at roomtemperature overnight. Ice water (800 g) was added and the mixture wasextracted with ethyl acetate (1×800 ml and 2×400 ml). The combinedorganic layers were washed with brine (3×400 ml), dried over sodiumsulfate, filtered and concentrated, yielding 3.17 g (110%) ofintermediate 10, which was used without further purification for thenext step.

Analogous Preparation of Intermediate 11

Analogous preparation of intermediate 31 starting from intermediate 28

Example A2a

Preparation of Intermediate 51

NaH (11.2 mg; 0.279 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 52(0.050 g; 0.140 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at0° C. for 30 minutes, then (2-bromoethoxy)-tert-butyldimethylsilane (6μL; 0.279 mmol) was added at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for30 minutes and at room temperature for 72 hours. Additional NaH (11.2mg; 0.279 mmol) was added at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for30 minutes and (2-bromoethoxy)-tert-butyldimethylsilane (6 μL; 0.279mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred at 00° C. for 30 minutes and 65hours at room temperature. Ice water (5 mL) was added and the mixturewas extracted with EtOAc (3×10 mL). The combined organic layers werewashed with brine (3×10 mL), dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered andconcentrated. The residue (0.118 g) was purified by columnchromatography over silica gel (eluent: DCM/MeOH: from 99/1 to 98/2).The product fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated togive 0.04 g (56%, yellow solid) of intermediate 51.

Example A3

Preparation of Intermediate 12

The reaction was performed in anhydrous conditions under argonatmosphere. Methanesulfonyl chloride (0.04 ml, 0.51 mmol) was addeddropwise to a mixture of compound 1 (0.104 g, 0.26 mmol), triethylamine(0.083 ml, 0.59 mmol) and 4-dimethyl-aminopyridin (0.004 g, 0.031 mmol)in dichloromethane (2.10 ml) at 00° C. The mixture was stirred at 0° C.for 10 minutes and at room temperature overnight. Ice water (25 ml) wasadded and the mixture was extracted with dichloromethane (4×25 ml). Thecombined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate, filtered andconcentrated. The aqueous layer was concentrated to dryness, yielding0.153 g (123%) of intermediate 12, which was used without furtherpurification for the next step.

Example A4

Preparation of Intermediate 12

The reaction was performed in anhydrous conditions under argonatmosphere. NaH (60% in mineral oil, 0.355 g, 8.86 mmol) was addedportionwise to a solution of intermediate 9 (1.60 g, 4.43 mmol) inN,N-dimethylformamide (12.7 ml) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at 0°C. for 30 minutes and 3-bromo-1-trimethylsilyl-1-propyne (2.03 ml, 12.4mmol) was added dropwise. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 3 hours.Water (450 ml) was added and the mixture was extracted with ethylacetate (4×200 ml). The combined organic layers were dried over sodiumsulfate, filtered and concentrated. The residue (6.12 g) was purified bychromatography over silica gel (mobile phase, gradient from 100% DCM to95% DCM, 5% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and the solventwas evaporated, yielding 1.60 g (77%) of intermediate 13.

Example A5

a) Preparation of Intermediate 14

A 6M HCl solution (16.4 ml, 98.3 mmol) was added to a solution ofintermediate 5 (1.8 g, 6.55 mmol) in 1,4-dioxane (30 ml) at roomtemperature. The reaction mixture was heated at 80° C. for 16 hours. Thereaction mixture was basified (pH=8) with a 3M NaOH solution (35 ml) andextracted with a 9/1 mixture of DCM and MeOH. The organic layers weredried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated to dryness. The residue waspurified by chromatography over silica gel (40-63 μm, mobile phase,gradient from 100% DCM to 85% DCM, 15% MeOH). The product fractions wereevaporated to dryness, yielding 1.17 g (68%) of intermediate 14.

b) Preparation of Intermediate 15

Phosphoryl chloride (16 ml, 172 mmol) was added to a solution ofintermediate 14 (1.2 g, 4.6 mmol) in chloroform (16 ml) at roomtemperature. The reaction mixture was refluxed for 16 hours, cooled downto room temperature and concentrated to dryness. The residue was takenup in a 95/5 mixture of DCM and MeOH (30 ml), cooled to 0° C. andcarefully basified with a 3M NaOH solution (10 ml). The mixture wasdiluted with water (10 ml) and extracted twice with a 95/5 mixture ofDCM and MeOH. The combined organic layers were dried over Na₂SO₄,filtered and concentrated to dryness. The residual solid was trituratedin Et₂O (50 ml), filtered, rinsed with Et₂O and dried under vacuumyielding 1.15 g (89%) of intermediate shown.

c) Preparation of Intermediate 16

3,5-Dimethoxyaniline (587 mg, 3.83 mmol) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine(1.34 ml, 7.67 mmol) were added to a suspension of2,8-dichloro-7-(1-methyl-1H-pyrazol-4-yl)-1,5-naphthyridine (1.07 g,3.83 mmol) in 1-propanol (30 ml). The mixture was refluxed for 16 hours.3,5-Dimethoxyaniline (176 mg, 1.15 mmol) and N,N-diisopropylethylamine(1.34 ml, 7.67 mmol) were added again, and the mixture was refluxed for4 hours. 3,5-Dimethoxyaniline (176 mg, 1.15 mmol) was added, the mixturewas refluxed for 16 hours and cooled down to room temperature. Theprecipitate was filtered off, washed with EtOH and dried under vacuum.The solid was taken up with a saturated aqueous solution of NaHCO₃ (100ml) and extracted with a 9/1 mixture of DCM and MeOH. The combinedorganic layers were dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered, concentrated to drynessand dried under vacuum for 16 hours yielding 840 mg (55%) ofintermediate 16 which was used without further purification for the nextstep.

d) Preparation of Intermediate 17

Sodium hydride (60% in mineral oil, 91 mg, 2.3 mmol) was added to asolution of intermediate 16 (300 mg, 0.76 mmol) in DMF (7.5 ml) at 0° C.The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 45 minutes and(3-bromopropoxy)-tert-butyldimethylsilane (0.264 ml, 1.14 mmol) wasadded. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 2 hours and at roomtemperature overnight. Water was added and the mixture was extractedwith DCM. The combined organic layers were washed with brine, dried overNa₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated to dryness yielding 616 mg ofintermediate 17 which was used without further purification for the nextstep.

Analogous preparation of intermediate 29 starting from intermediate 16

Example A6

Preparation of Intermediate 30

Potassium bis(trimethylsilyl)amide 1M in THF (6.29 mL; 6.29 mmol) wasadded to a solution of 2,6-difluoroaniline (0.369 mL; 3.43 mmol) in THF(8 mL) at 00° C. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 hour andintermediate 8 (0.700 g; 2.86 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirredat 0° C. for 2 hours and at room temperature overnight. Water (200 mL)was added and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc (3×100 mL). Theorganic layer was dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated. Theresidue (1 g, brown solid) was purified by column chromatography oversilica gel (eluent: from 100% DCM to 99% DCM, 1% MeOH). The productfractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 0.901 g(93%) of intermediate 30. MP: 209° C. (DSC).

Analogous preparation of intermediate 28 starting from intermediate 8

Analogous preparation of intermediate 36 starting from intermediate 8

Example A7

a) Preparation of Intermediate 35

Sodium triacetoxyborohydride (6.82 g; 32.2 mmol) and acetic acid (0.6mL) were added to a mixture of 3,5-dimethoxyaniline (3.08 g; 20.1 mmol)and 1-boc-4-piperidone (4.00 g; 20.1 mmol) in dichloroethane (150 mL) at0° C. The mixture was stirred at room temperature for 65 hours. Icewater (150 mL) and an aqueous saturated solution of K₂CO₃ (400 mL) wereadded and the mixture was extracted with DCM (4×200 mL). The combinedorganic layers were dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated to give6.80 g (100%, white solid) of intermediate 35. The product was used assuch in the next step.

b) Preparation of Intermediate 34

Pd(OAc)₂ (0.02 g; 0.08 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 8(0.40 g; 1.63 mmol), intermediate 35 (0.77 g; 2.28 mmol), Cs₂CO₃ (1.59g; 4.89 mmol) and Ruphos (0.01 g; 0.02 mmol) in dioxane (6 mL). Themixture was heated at 100° C. overnight. Water (200 mL) was added andthe mixture was extracted with DCM (4×150 mL). The combined organiclayers were dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residuewas purified by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent: DCM/MeOH100/0 to 95/5). The product fractions were collected and concentrated togive 0.30 g of intermediate 34 (purity 12%, contaminated by 88% ofintermediate 8).

Example A8

a) Preparation of Intermediate 38

Sodium borohydride (0.994 g; 26.28 mmol) was added portion wise to asolution of 4-formyl-N, N-dimethyl-1H-imidazole-1-sulfonamide (CAS140174-48-7) (4.45 g; 21.9 mmol) in MeOH (45 mL) at 5° C. under N₂ flow.The reaction mixture was then stirred at room temperature for 2 hours,poured onto ice water, extracted with DCM, dried over MgSO₄, filteredand evaporated to dryness. The residue was crystallized from Et₂O. Theprecipitate was filtered and dried yielding 2.5 g (56%) of intermediate38 M.P.: 99° C. (Kofler).

b) Preparation of Intermediate 37

Methanesulfonyl chloride (0.249 mL; 3.22 mmol) and LiCl (0.341 g; 8.04mmol) were added to a solution of intermediate 38 (0.550 g; 2.68 mmol)and Et₃N (0.747 mL; 5.36 mmol) in THF (6 mL) at 0° C. The mixture wasstirred at 0° C. for 1 hour and at room temperature for 3 hours. Water(100 mL) was added and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc (3×50 mL).The combined organic layers were washed with brine (75 mL), dried overNa₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated to give 0.597 g (100%, yellow oil withtendency to crystallize) (stored at 4° C.) of intermediate 37. Theproduct was used as such in the next step.

Example A9

Preparation of Intermediate 39

Et₃N (7.46 mL; 52.11 mmol), p-toluenesulfonyl chloride (9.94 g; 52.11mmol) and DMAP (531 mg; 4.34 mmol) were added successively to a solutionof (R)-(−)5-(hydroxymethyl)-2-pyrrolidinone (CAS 66673-40-3) (5 g; 43.43mmol) in DCM (75 mL) at 5° C. under N₂ flow. The reaction mixture wasstirred at room temperature for 2 hours. An aqueous solution of HCl 1Nwas added. The mixture was extracted with DCM (3 times). The organiclayer was dried over MgSO₄, filtered and the solvent was evaporated todryness. The residue was taken up in ACN, filtered, washed with Et₂O anddried yielding 8.44 g (72%) of intermediate 39.

Example A10

Preparation of Intermediate 41

NaH (0.105 g; 2.64 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 33 (0.5g; 1.32 mmol) in DMF (13 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at 0° C.for 45 minutes and 1H-1,2,4-Triazole-3-methanol,1-(triphenylmethyl)-,3-methanesulfonate (CAS: 163009-16-3) (1.11 g; 2.64mmol) was added portion wise. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 30minutes and at room temperature for 16 hours. EtOAc (100 mL) was addedand the mixture was washed with brine (3×100 mL). The organic layer wasdried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residue (1.54 g,orange foam) was purified by column chromatography over silica gel(eluent: DCM/MeOH 99/1 to 95/5). The product fractions were collectedand the solvent was evaporated to give 0.785 g (85%, yellow foam) ofintermediate 41.

Analogous preparation of intermediate 40 starting from intermediate 9

Analogous preparation of intermediate 42 starting from intermediate 28

Example A11

a) Preparation of Intermediate 43

Dimethylsulfamoyl chloride (3.09 mL; 28.62 mmol) was added to a solutionof 1-H-pyrazole-3-carbaldehyde (2.5 g; 26.02 mmol) and triethylamine(5.96 mL; 41.63 mmol) in ACN (25 mL) and the reaction mixture wasstirred at 50° C. overnight. The reaction mixture was poured into icewater and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed with brineand dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The residuewas purified by chromatography over silica gel (Irregular SiOH, 15-45μm, 80 g; mobile phase: 99% DCM, 1% MeOH). The product fractions werecollected and evaporated to dryness yielding 4.42 g of intermediate 43(84%).

b) Preparation of Intermediate 44

Sodium borohydride (987.41 mg; 26.1 mmol) was added portionwise to asolution of intermediate 43 (4.42 g; 21.75 mmol) in MeOH (50 mL) at 5°C. The reaction mixture was then stirred at room temperature 2 hours,poured onto ice water, extracted with DCM, dried over MgSO₄, filteredand evaporated to dryness. The crude product was taken up with Et₂O. Theprecipitate was filtered and dried yielding 3.04 g of intermediate 44(73%).c) Preparation of Intermediate 45

Triethylamine (4.24 mL; 29.63 mmol), methanesulfonyl chloride (1.38 mL;17.78 mmol) and lithium chloride (1.88 g; 44.45 mmol) were addedsuccessively to a solution of intermediate 44 (3.04 g; 14.82 mmol) inTHF (75 mL) at 5° C. under N₂ flow and the reaction mixture was stirredat room temperature for 4 hours. The reaction mixture was poured intoice water and extracted with EtOAc. The organic layer was washed withbrine, dried over MgSO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness yielding3.82 g of intermediate 45 which was used in the next step without anyfurther purification.

Example A12

a) Preparation of Intermediate 57

6-methoxy-1,7-naphthyridin-4(1H)-one (CAS 952059-64-2) (19.2 g; 66.2mmol) was solubilized by heating in acetic acid (300 mL) andN-bromosuccinimide (17.7 g; 99.2 mmol) was added. The mixture wasstirred at room temperature for 1 hour. The resulting yellow precipitatewas filtered off and successively washed with acetic acid (2×100 mL) andEt₂O (2×200 mL) to give 16.3 g (96%, pale yellow solid) of intermediate57 which was used as such in the next step.

b) Preparation of Intermediate 58

The reaction was performed on 2 batches of intermediate 57 (16.3 g; 63.9mmol) and (10.1 g; 39.6 mmol):

POCl₃ (160 mL; 1.72 mol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 57 (16.3g; 63.9 mmol) in chloroform (160 mL). The solution was stirred at refluxfor 2 hours, concentrated and dried under vacuum. The residual solid wastaken up with EtOAc (300 mL), cooled to 0° C. and carefully basifiedwith a 3M aqueous solution of NaOH (250 mL). Then, the resulting mixturewas diluted with water (200 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3×400 mL). Thecombined organic layers were dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered, combined withthe other batch (from 10.1 g of intermediate 57) and concentrated togive 26.5 g (overall yield 94%, pale yellow solid) of intermediate 58which was used as such in the next step.

c) Preparation of Intermediate 59

The reaction was performed on 2 batches of intermediate 58 (21.5 g; 78.6mmol) and (9.8 g; 358 mmol):

A solution of intermediate 58 (21.5 g; 78.6 mmol),1-methylpyrazole-4-boronic acid pinacol ester (17.2 g; 82.5 mmol),Na₂CO₃ (25 g; 236 mmol) in a mixture of dioxane (510 mL) and water (210mL) was degassed and backfilled with argon (operation repeated 3 times).PdCl₂(dppf).CH₂Cl₂ (3.21 g; 3.93 mmol) was added and the resultingmixture was degassed and backfilled with argon (operation repeatedtwice) and stirred at 110° C. for 16 hours. After cooling to roomtemperature and concentration of the solution, the residue was combinedwith the other batch (from 9.8 g). A mixture of EtOAc (800 mL) and MeOH(100 mL) was added. The organic layer was washed with a saturatedaqueous solution of NaHCO₃ (500 mL) and water (300 mL). The layers wereseparated and the aqueous layer was extracted with a mixture of EtOAcand MeOH (9/1; 3×300 mL). The combined organic layers were dried overNa₂SO₄, filtered and evaporated to dryness. The resulting solid wastriturated in Et₂O (500 mL), filtered off and rinsed with Et₂O (200 mL)to give 29.3 g (overall yield 93%, red-brown solid) of intermediate 59M.P.: 180° C. (DSC).

d) Preparation of Intermediate 60

A catalytic amount of Raney Nickel, 50% slurry in water (1.88 g; 32.0mmol) was washed twice with EtOH and collected after decantation. Thiscatalytic amount was added to a solution of intermediate 59 (29.3 g; 107mmol) in a mixture of EtOH (500 mL), THF (500 mL) and NaOH 1N (112 mL;112 mmol). The mixture was purged and stirred under hydrogen atmosphere(1 bar) at 50° C. for 65 hours. The mixture was cooled to roomtemperature, filtered through a pad of Celite® which was washed with amixture of THF and EtOH (1/1; 400 mL) and concentrated. The residue(brown solid) was adsorbed on silica gel and purified by columnchromatography over silica gel (eluent: from 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 95%DCM, 5% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and the solvent wasevaporated. The resulting solid (16.5 g, orange solid) was triturated inEt₂O (300 mL), filtered off and washed with Et₂O (100 mL) to give 13.15g (51%, beige solid) of intermediate 60. M.P.: 161° C. (DSC).

e) Preparation of Intermediate 61

AlCl₃ (16.6 g; 125 mmol) was added in one portion to a solution ofintermediate 60 (5 g; 20.8 mmol) in 1,2-dichloroethane (300 mL) at roomtemperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at reflux for 1 hour andcooled to room temperature. MeOH (500 mL) was added. The mixture wasconcentrated under reduced pressure, taken up in a mixture of MeOH andDCM (8/2; 1 L), adsorbed on silica gel and purified by columnchromatography over silica gel (eluent: from 95% DCM, 5% MeOH to 80%DCM, 20% MeOH). The product fractions were collected and the solvent wasevaporated to give 13.8 g (brown solid) of intermediate 61 which wasused as such in the next step.

f) Preparation of Intermediate 62

N-Phenyl-bis(trifluoromethanesulfonimide) (14.9 g; 41.6 mmol) was addedportion wise to a suspension of intermediate 61 (13.8 g; 20.8 mmol) andEt₃N (43.5 mL; 312 mmol) in a mixture of DCM (400 mL) and DMF (100 mL)at room temperature. The reaction mixture was stirred at roomtemperature for 65 hours and concentrated under reduced pressure. Theresidue was taken up in a mixture of EtOAc (500 mL) and brine (500 mL),filtered through a pad of Celite® which was rinsed with EtOAc (200 mL)and brine (200 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer wasextracted with EtOAc (2×200 mL). The combined organic layers were driedover Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residue (25.2 g, brown oil)was purified by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent: from 100%DCM to 96% DCM, 4% MeOH). The fractions containing the product werecollected and the solvent was evaporated. The resulting residue (3.5 g,pale brown oil) was purified by column chromatography over silica gel(eluent: from 100% DCM to 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The product fractions werecollected and the solvent was evaporated to give 1.02 g (14% over 2steps from intermediate 60, beige solid) of intermediate 62.

g) Preparation of Intermediate 63

The reaction was performed on 2 batches of intermediate 62 (0.57 g; 1.58mmol) and (0.42 g; 1.17 mmol):

A solution of intermediate 62 (0.57 g; 1.58 mmol), 3,5-dimethoxyaniline(0.29 g; 1.89 mmol), Cs₂CO₃ (1.54 g; 4.73 mmol) and xantphos (0.05 g;0.08 mmol) in toluene (40 mL) was degassed and backfilled with argon(operation repeated 3 times). Pd₂dba₃ (0.04 g; 0.047 mmol) was added.The resulting mixture was degassed and backfilled with argon (operationrepeated twice), stirred at 110° C. for 16 hours and concentrated underreduced pressure. The residue was taken up in a mixture of water (100mL) and DCM (100 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layerwas extracted with DCM (2×50 mL). The combined organic layers were driedover Na₂SO₄ and concentrated. The residues coming from the 2 batcheswere combined and the resulting residue was purified by columnchromatography over silica gel (eluent: DCM/MeOH 99/1 to 97/3). Theproduct fractions were collected and concentrated. The resulting solidwas triturated in Et₂O (30 mL), filtered off, rinsed with Et₂O (10 mL)and dried under vacuum to give 0.66 g (overall yield 63%) ofintermediate 63 (M.P.: 208° C. (DSC).

Example A13

a) Preparation of Intermediate 64

Two reactions, performed on intermediate 62 respectively on 0.938 g and0.100 g, were combined for the work up. The synthesis is describedbelow:

A solution of intermediate 62 (0.938 g; 2.62 mmol),2,6-difluoro-3,5-dimethoxyaniline (0.990 g; 5.24 mmol), Cs₂CO₃ (4.26 g;13.1 mmol) and xantphos (0.151 g; 0.26 mmol) in a mixture of toluene (65mL) and dioxane (20 mL) was degassed and backfilled with argon(operation repeated 3 times). Pd₂dba₃ (0.144 g; 0.16 mmol) was added.The resulting mixture was degassed and backfilled with argon (operationrepeated twice), stirred at 110° C. for 65 hours and concentrated underreduced pressure. The residue was pooled with the reaction mixtureperformed on 0.1 g of intermediate 62 in a mixture of DCM (200 mL) andMeOH (50 mL), adsorbed on silica gel and purified by columnchromatography over silica gel (eluent: DCM/MeOH 99/1 to 97/3). Thefractions containing the product were collected and the solvent wasevaporated. The residue (0.578 g, orange solid) was triturated in Et₂O(30 mL), filtered off, rinsed with Et₂O (10 mL) and dried under vacuumat 80° C. overnight to give 0.431 g (37%, yellow solid) of intermediate64. M.P.: 228° C. (DSC).

Analogous preparation of intermediate 65 starting from intermediate 62

B. Preparation of the compounds

Example B1

Preparation of Compound 1

The reaction was performed in anhydrous conditions under argonatmosphere. Tetrabutylammonium fluoride (1M in THF; 7.3 ml, 7.3 mmol)was added to a solution of intermediate 10 (crude 3.17 g, maximum 5.53mmol) in THF (120 ml) and the mixture was stirred at room temperatureovernight. Ice water (400 ml) and an aqueous saturated solution ofpotassium carbonate (600 ml) were added. The mixture was extracted withethyl acetate (1×800 ml and 2×300 ml). The combined organic layers werewashed with brine (400 ml), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered andconcentrated. The residue was purified by chromatography over silica gel(mobile phase, gradient from 100% DCM to 98% DCM, 2% MeOH). The desiredfractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated, yielding 1.51 g(67% over 2 steps) of compound 1.

Analogous preparation of compound 2

starting from intermediate 11

Analogous preparation of compound 22 starting from intermediate 31

Example B1-a

Preparation of Compound 61

Intermediate 51 (0.04 g; 0.077 mmol) was dissolved in a mixture ofaqueous HCl 3N (2 mL) and THF (3 mL). The reaction mixture was stirredat room temperature for 16 hours. The mixture was quenched with a 3Msolution of NaOH (4 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3×10 mL). The organiclayer were dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residue(yellow gum) was purified by column chromatography over silica gel(eluent: DCM/MeOH 98/2). The product fractions were collected and thesolvent was evaporated. The yellow solid was triturated in Et₂O (15 mL).The supernatant liquid was removed and the resulting solid was driedunder vacuum (70° C., 5 h) to give 0.022 g (71%, pale yellow solid) ofcompound 61. MP: 209° C. (Buchi M-560).

Example B2

Preparation of Compound 3

The reaction was performed in anhydrous conditions under argonatmosphere. NaH (60% in mineral oil, 0.1 g, 2.5 mmol) was added to amixture of intermediate 9 (0.3 g, 0.83 mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide (7ml) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 45 minutes andbromo-ethyl methyl ether (0.31 ml, 3.32 mmol) was added. The mixture wasstirred at 0° C. for 1 hour and at room temperature overnight. Ice water(100 ml) was added and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate(3×100 ml). The combined organic layers were dried over sodium sulfate,filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatographyover silica gel (mobile phase, gradient from 100% DCM to 90% DCM, 10%MeOH). The product fractions were collected and the solvent wasevaporated. The residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate (100 ml) andwashed with water (3×60 ml). The organic layer was dried over sodiumsulfate, filtered and concentrated. The residue was triturated indiethyl ether (4×5 ml) and dried under vacuum, yielding 0.222 g (64%) ofcompound 3 (MP: 138° C. (DSC)).

Analogous preparation of compound 35 starting from intermediate 28

Analogous preparation of compound 36 starting from intermediate 33

Analogous preparation of compound 45 starting from intermediate 28

Analogous preparation of compound 50 starting from intermediate 9

Analogous preparation of compound 51 starting from intermediate 33

Analogous preparation of compound 54 starting from intermediate 33

Analogous preparation of compound 57 starting from intermediate 33

Analogous preparation of compound 69 starting from intermediate 63

Example B2a-1

Preparation of Compound 40

NaH (0.380 g; 9.49 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 33(0.900 g; 2.37 mmol) in DMF (18 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at0° C. for 45 minutes and intermediate 39 (0.958 g; 3.56 mmol) was added.The mixture was stirred at 00° C. for 1 hour and at room temperatureovernight. Water (100 mL) and brine (150 mL) were added and the mixturewas extracted with EtOAc (3×150 mL). The combined organic layers weredried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residue (1.96 g, brownoil) was purified by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent:DCM/MeOH 100/0 to 95/5). The product fractions were collected and thesolvent was evaporated. The resulting solid was triturated in Et₂O anddried under vacuum to give 0.354 g (31%, yellow solid) of the expectedcompound which was purified again by column chromatography over silicagel (eluent: DCM/MeOH 98/2 to 96/4). The product fractions werecollected and the solvent was evaporated affording 2 fractions whichwere triturated in Et₂O. The precipitates were filtered and dried undervacuum to give 0.071 g (6%, yellow solid) of compound 40 and 0.207 g(18%, yellow solid) of compound 40 M.P.: decomposition starting from211° C., DSC).

Example B2a-2

Preparation of Compound 41

NaH (0.443 g; 11.1 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 9 (1.00g; 2.77 mmol) in DMF (20 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at 0° C.for 45 minutes and intermediate 39 (CAS 128899-31-0) (1.12 g; 4.16 mmol)was added. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 hour and at roomtemperature overnight. Water (250 mL) and brine (100 mL) were added andthe mixture was extracted with EtOAc (3×150 mL). The combined organiclayers were dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residue(2.47 g, brown oil) was purified by column chromatography over silicagel (eluent: DCM/MeOH 100/0 to 95/5). The product fractions werecollected and the solvent was evaporated to give 0.289 g (yellow solid)of the expected compound which was purified again by columnchromatography over silica gel (eluent: DCM/methanol 98/2 to 95/5). Theproduct fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give0.235 g (19%, beige solid) of compound 41. M.P.: decomposition startingfrom 276° C., DSC).

Example B2a-3

Preparation of Compound 42

NaH (0.362 g; 9.04 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 28(0.900 g; 2.26 mmol) in DMF (20 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at0° C. for 45 minutes and intermediate 39 (0.913 g; 3.39 mmol) was added.The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 hour and at room temperature for72 hours. Water (100 mL) and brine (150 mL) were added and the mixturewas extracted with EtOAc (3×150 mL). The combined organic layers weredried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residue (2.42 g, brownoil) was purified by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent:EtOAc/MeOH 100/0 to 98/2). The product fractions were collected and thesolvent was evaporated to give 0.502 g (yellow gum) of expected productwhich was purified again by column chromatography over silica gel (15-40μm, eluent: DCM/MeOH 99/1 to 97/3). The product fractions were collectedand the solvent was evaporated. The resulting residue was triturated inEt₂O. The precipitate was filtered and dried under vacuum to give 0.239g (21%, yellow solid) of compound 42. M.P.: decomposition starting from233° C. (DSC).

Example B2a-4

Preparation of Compound 43

NaH (0.380 g; 9.49 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 33(0.900 g; 2.37 mmol) in DMF (18 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at00° C. for 45 minutes and (S)-(+)-5-(hydroxy-methyl)-2-pyrrolidinonep-toluenesulfonate (CAS 51693-17-5) (0.958 g; 3.56 mmol) was added. Themixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 hour and at room temperatureovernight. Water (100 mL) and brine (150 mL) were added and the mixturewas extracted with EtOAc (3×150 mL). The combined organic layers weredried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residue (3.34 g, brownoil) was purified by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent:DCM/MeOH 100/0 to 96/4). The product fractions were collected and thesolvent was evaporated. The resulting residue was triturated in Et₂O anddried under vacuum to give 0.277 g (25%, brown solid) of compound 43.M.P.: decomposition starting from 221° C. (DSC).

Analogous preparation of compound 37 starting from intermediate 9

Analogous preparation of compound 44 starting from intermediate 28

Example B2a-5

Preparation of Compound 70

NaH (0.160 g; 4.00 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 64(0.397 g; 1.00 mmol) in DMF (10 mL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture wasstirred at 0° C. for 45 minutes and (2-chloroethyl)-methylaminehydrochloride (CAS 4535-90-4) (0.195 g; 1.50 mmol) was added. Thereaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 hour then, at roomtemperature for 65 hours. Water (30 mL) and brine (70 mL) were added andthe mixture was extracted with EtOAc (3×50 mL). The combined organiclayers were washed with brine (3×50 mL), dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered andthe solvent was evaporated. The residue (0.85 g, red-brown solid) waspurified by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent:DCM/MeOH/NH₄OH: from 95/5/0 to 90/10/0 to 90/10/1). The productfractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated to give 230 mgof an intermediate residue which was triturated in Et₂O (20 mL). Theprecipitate was filtered off, washed with Et₂O and dried under vacuum at80° C. for 16 hours to give 210 mg (47%) of compound 70. M.P.: 148° C.(DSC).

Example B2a-6

Preparation of Compound 46

Two reactions performed on intermediate 28 respectively on 1.00 g and0.050 g were combined for the work up. The synthesis is described below:NaH (0.403 g; 10.1 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 28(1.00 g; 2.52 mmol) in DMF (25 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at0° C. for 45 minutes and methylaminoethyl chloride hydrochloride (0.491g; 3.78 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 hour andat room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture and the reactionmixture (from 0.05 g of intermediate 28) were combined. Water (100 mL)and brine (150 mL) were added. The mixture was extracted with EtOAc(3×150 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over Na₂SO₄, filteredand concentrated. The residue (4.43 g, brown oil) was purified by columnchromatography over silica gel (eluent: DCM/MeOH 100/0 to 93/7). Theproduct fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated. Theresulting fraction was triturated in Et₂O (4×5 mL) and dried undervacuum to give 0.208 g (18%, yellow solid) of compound 46. 0.184 g ofthis fraction were purified by achiral SFC on (AMINO 6 μm 150×21.2 mm;mobile phase: 0.3% isopropylamine, 75% CO₂, 25% MeOH). The productfractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated. The residue(145 mg) was crystallized from Et₂O to give, after filtration, 124 mg(11%) of compound 46. M.P.: 157° C. (DSC).

Analogous preparation of compound 52 starting from intermediate 36

Analogous preparation of compound 73 starting from intermediate 65

Example B3

Preparation of

A mixture of intermediate 9 (0.5 g, 1.4 mmol), tetrabutyl ammoniumbromide (0.11 g, 0.35 mmol) and Potassium hydroxide (1.16 g, 20.8 mmol)in 2-methyltetrahydrofuran (7.5 ml) and water (0.6 ml) was heated at 50°C. for 1 hour. Isopropylaminoethyl chloride hydrochloride (0.39 g, 2.5mmol) was added and the mixture was heated at 50° C. overnight. Water(25 ml) was added and the mixture was extracted with a mixture ofdichloromethane/methanol 95/5 (3×25 ml). The combined organic layerswere dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. The residuewas purified by chromatography over silica gel (mobile phase, gradientfrom 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 90% DCM, 10% MeOH). The desired fractions werecollected and the solvent was evaporated, yielding 0.233 g of a residuethat was further submitted for purification by chromatography oversilica gel (mobile phase, gradient from 95% DCM, 5% MeOH to 95% DCM, 5%MeOH, 0.1% NH₄OH). The desired fractions were collected and the solventwas evaporated, yielding 0.13 g of Fraction 1 consisting of a mixture ofcompound 4 and compound 5.

Alternatively a mixture of compound 4 and 6 can be obtained using thefollowing conditions:

In anhydrous conditions under argon atmosphere, NaH (60% in mineral oil,0.232 g, 5.8 mmol) was added slowly to a suspension of intermediate 9(0.35 g, 0.97 mmol) in N,N-dimethylformamide (10 ml) at 0° C. and themixture was stirred at 0° C. for 10 minutes. Isopropylaminoethylchloride hydrochloride (0.459 g, 2.9 mmol) was added portionwise and thereaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 48 h ours. Thereaction mixture was quenched with a saturated solution of ammoniumchloride (15 ml) and the mixture was extracted with ethyl acetate (3×50ml). The combined organic layers were washed with a saturated solutionof sodium chloride (2×50 ml), dried over sodium sulfate, filtered andconcentrated to dryness. The residue was purified by chromatography oversilica gel (mobile phase, gradient from 95% DCM, 5% MeOH to 90% DCM,10%). The fractions were collected and the solvent was evaporatedyielding 0.22 g of fraction 2 composed of a mixture of compound 4 andcompound 6.

Fraction 1 and Fraction 2 were combined and purified by achiral SFC(mobile phase, 0.3% isopropylamine, 86% CO₂, 14% MeOH). The desiredfractions were collected and concentrated, yielding 17 mg of compound 5,168 mg of compound 4 and 60 mg of product fraction 3 containing compound4 and compound 6.

Compound 4 was converted into the HCl salt (3 eq. 1M solution in water)in Et₂O and triturated. The precipitate was filtered off, washed withEt₂O and dried under vacuum, yielding 153 mg of compound 4 (mp=175° C.Kofler).

Product fraction 3 was purified by chiral SFC on (5 μm mobile phase,0.3% isopropylamine, 85% CO₂, 15% MeOH), yielding 22 mg of compound 6.

Example B3a

Preparation of Compound 30

A mixture of intermediate 33 (0.56 g; 1.46 mmol), tetrabutylammoniumbromide (0.12 g; 0.37 mmol) and KOH (1.23 g; 21.9 mmol) in2-methyltetrahydrofuran (8.5 mL) and water (1 mL) was heated at 50° C.for 1 hour. Methylaminoethyl chloride hydrochloride (0.34 g; 2.63 mmol)was added and the mixture was heated at 50° C. overnight. Water (200 mL)was added and the mixture was extracted with DCM (3×150 mL). Thecombined organic layers were dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered andconcentrated. The residue was purified by column chromatography oversilica gel (eluent: DCM/MeOH 98/2 to 85/15). The fractions containingthe product were collected and concentrated to afford after triturationin Et₂O and drying under vacuum to give 0.408 g of the expectedcompound. This solid was purified by achiral SFC on (AMINO 6 μm 150×21.2mm; mobile phase: 0.3% isopropylamine, 75% CO₂, 25% MeOH) to give 308 mgof an intermediate residue which was crystallized from Et₂O to afford256 mg (40%) of compound 30. MP: 120° C. (gum) (Kofler).

Analogous preparation of compound 12 starting from intermediate 18

Analogous preparation of compound 13 starting from intermediate 23

Analogous preparation of compound 23 starting from intermediate 32

Analogous preparation of compound 26 starting from intermediate 28

Analogous preparation of compound 68 starting from intermediate 63

Example B3b

Preparation of Compound 21

and compound 20

A mixture of intermediate 30 (0.66 g; 1.94 mmol), tetrabutylammoniumbromide (0.16 g; 0.49 mmol) and KOH (1.63 g; 29.1 mmol) in2-methyltetrahydrofuran (11 mL) and water (1.6 mL) was heated at 50° C.for 1 hour. Isopropylaminoethyl chloride hydrochloride (0.55 g; 3.49mmol) was added and the mixture was heated at 50° C. overnight. Water(400 mL) was added and the mixture was extracted with DCM (3×200 mL).The combined organic layers were washed with brine (300 mL), dried overNa₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by columnchromatography over silica gel (eluent: DCM/MeOH 100/0 to 85/15). Thefractions containing the product were collected and concentrated to give0.485 g of a mixture of compound 20 and 21. This solid was purified byachiral SFC on (CYANO 6 μm 150×21.2 mm; mobile phase: 0.3%isopropylamine, 80% CO₂, 20% MeOH) to give 40 mg of compound 20 (5%),M.P.: 130-134° C. (Kofler), and 360 mg of an intermediate compound whichwas crystallized from Et₂O to give 330 mg (40%) of compound 21. M.P.:78° C. (DSC).

Analogous preparation of compound 29

and compound 28

starting from intermediate 33

Example B4

Preparation of Compound 7

The reaction was performed in anhydrous conditions under argon. NaH (60%in mineral oil; 0.083 g, 2.1 mmol) was added portionwise to a solutionof intermediate 9 (0.5 g, 1.4 mmol) in DMF (7 ml) at 0° C. The reactionmixture was stirred at 0° C. for 30 minutes and2-(chloromethyl)-N,N-dimethyl-1H-imidazole-1-sulfonamide, (0.371 g, 1.7mmol) was added. The mixture was warmed up to room temperatureovernight. The mixture was diluted with water (25 ml) and extracted withethyl acetate (3×40 ml). The combined organic layers were washed with asaturated aqueous solution of NaCl (3×40 ml), dried over sodium sulfate,filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by chromatographyover silica gel (mobile phase, gradient from 99% DCM, 1% MeOH to 95%DCM, 5% MeOH). The desired fractions were collected and the solvent wasevaporated to give 0.55 g (72%) of compound 7 which was used withoutfurther purification for the next step.

Analogous preparation of compound 17 starting from intermediate 16

Analogous preparation of compound 18 starting from intermediate 30

Analogous preparation of compound 25 starting from intermediate 32

Analogous preparation of compound 27 starting from intermediate 33

Analogous preparation of compound 32 starting from intermediate 9

Analogous preparation of compound 33 starting from intermediate 36

Analogous preparation of compound 38 starting from intermediate 9 andintermediate 37

Analogous preparation of compound 56 starting from intermediate 33 andintermediate 45

Analogous preparation of compound 58 starting from intermediate 33 and1,3-oxazole-2-ylmethylmethanesulfonate (CAS 916810-51-0)

Analogous preparation of compound 60 starting from intermediate 46

Analogous preparation of compound 63 starting from intermediate 52

Analogous preparation of compound 64 starting from intermediate 28

Analogous preparation of compound 66 starting from intermediate 63

Analogous preparation of compound 71 starting from intermediate 64

Analogous preparation of compound 76 starting from intermediate 65

Example B4a

Preparation of Compound 14

The reaction was performed on 2 batches of intermediate 28 (0.057 g;0.14 mmol) and (0.23 g; 0.58 mmol):

NaH (0.07 g; 1.74 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 28(0.230 g; 0.58 mmol) in DMF (8 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at0° C. for 45 minutes and 2-(chloromethyl)pyrimidine hydrochloride (0.143g; 0.87 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 3 hours.Water (200 mL) was added and the reaction mixture (from 0.057 g ofintermediate 28) was combined to the mixture. The mixture was extractedwith EtOAc (3×200 mL). The combined organic layers were dried overNa₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residue (1.73 g, brown oil) waspurified by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent: DCM/MeOH from100/0 to 95/5). The product fractions were collected and the solvent wasevaporated to give 0.295 g which was triturated in Et₂O (4×5 mL). Thesolid was filtered and dried under vacuum to give 0.286 g (overall yield81%, yellow solid) of compound 14 M.P.: 183° C. (DSC).

Example B5

Preparation of Compound 8

Potassium carbonate (0.45 g, 3.4 mmol) was added to a mixture ofintermediate 13 (1.6 g, 3.4 mmol) in MeOH (34 ml) and the mixture wasstirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture was concentrated todryness and purified by chromatography over silica gel (mobile phase,98% DCM, 2%). The desired fractions were collected and the solvent wasevaporated, yielding 0.665 g (49%) of compound 8.

Example B6

Preparation of Compound 11

A 1M tetrabutylammonium solution in THF (1.13 ml, 1.13 mmol) was addedto a solution of intermediate 17 (0.76 mmol) in THF (38 ml). Thereaction mixture was stirred at room temperature for 2 hours. Water anda saturated solution of K₂CO₃ were added and the mixture was extractedwith AcOEt. The combined organic layers were washed with brine, driedover Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated to dryness. The residue waspurified by chromatography over silica gel (40-63 μm, mobile phase,gradient from 98% DCM, % MeOH to 96% DCM, 4% MeOH). The productfractions were collected and evaporated to dryness, yielding 190 mg(55%) of compound 11 (MP: 167° C., DSC).

Analogous preparation of compound 15 starting from intermediate 29

Example B7

Preparation of Compound 48

Two reactions performed on intermediate 41 respectively on 0.735 g and0.05 g were combined for the work up. The synthesis is described below:

HCl 12M (0.436 mL; 5.23 mmol) was added to a solution of intermediate 41(0.735 g; 1.05 mmol) in MeOH (15 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was warmed toroom temperature and stirred at room temperature for 16 hours. Thereaction mixture and the reaction mixture (from 0.05 g of intermediate41) were poured into a mixture of ice water (100 mL) and solid NaHCO₃(about 20 g). The aqueous layer was extracted with a mixture ofEtOAc/MeOH (9/1; 3×40 mL). The combined organic layers were dried overNa₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residue (1.32 g, yellow solid)was adsorbed on silica gel and purified by column chromatography oversilica gel (eluent: DCM/MeOH 97/3 to 93/7). The product fractions werecollected and the solvent was evaporated. The residue (0.500 g) wastriturated in Et₂O (30 mL). The precipitate was filtered off, washedwith Et₂O (10 mL) and dried under vacuum at 80° C. for 16 hours to give0.420 g (overall yield 82%, yellow solid) of compound 48. M.P.: 216° C.(DSC).

Analogous preparation of compound 47 starting from intermediate 40

Analogous preparation of compound 49 starting from intermediate 42

Example B8

Preparation of Compound 31

HCl 4M in dioxane (6.9 mL; 27.7 mmol) was added to a mixture ofintermediate 34 (0.30 g; 0.55 mmol) in DCM (1.5 mL) and the mixture wasstirred at room temperature overnight. A 2M aqueous solution of NaOH (15mL) and water (130 mL) were added (pH=14). The mixture was extractedwith DCM (3×100 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine(150 mL), dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residue waspurified by column chromatography over silica gel (eluent: DCM/MeOH 95/5to 90/10, then DCM/MeOH/NH₄OH 90/10/0.1 to 90/10/0.4).

The fractions containing the product were collected and concentrated togive 0.084 g of the expected compound. This solid was purified bypreparative TLC (SiOH, eluent: DCM/MeOH/NH₄OH 90/10/0.1) to give anintermediate residue which was triturated in Et₂O and dried under vacuumto give 68 mg of expected compound. This fraction was purified byreverse phase chromatography (C18 Luna 10 μm, eluent:MeOH/water/trifluoroacetic acid 40/60/0.1). The resulting fraction wastriturated in Et₂O. The precipitate was filtered and dried under vacuumto give 0.025 g (10%) of compound 31. MP: 150° C. (DSC).

Example B9

Preparation of Compound 74

NaH (8 mg; 0.198 mmol) was added to a mixture of intermediate 65 (50 mg;0.132 mmol) in DMF (2 mL) at 0° C. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for30 minutes, then (2-bromoethoxy)-tert-butyldimethylsilane (CAS86864-60-1) (0.042 mL; 0.198 mmol) was added at 0° C. The mixture wasstirred at 0° C. for 1 hour and at room temperature for 65 hours. Thereaction mixture was cooled to 0° C. and additional NaH (8 mg; 0.198mmol) was added The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 30 minutes, then(2-bromoethoxy)-tert-butyldimethylsilane (CAS 86864-60-1) (0.042 mL;0.198 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 hour andat room temperature for 2 hours.

Ice water (5 mL) was added and the mixture was extracted with EtOAc(3×10 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (3×10 mL),dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residue was taken-upwith THF (2 mL) and aqueous 3M HCl (2 mL) and stirred at roomtemperature for 16 hours. The reaction mixture was basified with anaqueous 3M solution of NaOH (2.5 mL), diluted with water (20 mL) andextracted with a mixture of DCM/MeOH (9/1; 3×15 mL). The organic layerswere dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and the solvent was evaporated. Theresidue (0.067 g) was purified by column chromatography over silica gel(eluent: DCM/MeOH: from 98/2 to 97/3). The product fractions werecollected and the solvent was evaporated to give 24 mg of anintermediate residue which was triturated in Et₂O (2 mL). Theprecipitate was filtered off rinsed with Et₂O (10 mL) and dried undervacuum at 80° C. for 16 hours to give 20 mg (36%, yellow solid) ofcompound 74. M.P.: 200° C. (DSC).

Analogous preparation of compound 75 starting from intermediate 65

Analogous preparation of compound 78 starting from intermediate 66

C. Conversion of compounds

Example C1

Preparation of Compound 9

Compound 1 (1.0 g, 2.5 mmol) was added to a mixture of triphenylphosphine (0.776 g, 3.0 mmol), 2,3-dichloro-5,6-dicyanobenzoquinone(0.672 g, 3.0 mmol) and tetrabutylammonium bromide (0.954 g, 3.0 mmol)in dichloromethane (22 ml). The mixture was stirred at room temperaturefor 30 minutes and concentrated to dryness. The residual brown solid waspurified by chromatography over silica gel (mobile phase, gradient from100% DCM to 80% DCM, 20%). The product fractions were collected and thesolvent was evaporated, yielding 0.720 g (62%) of compound 9.

Example C2

Preparation of Compound 10

A 4N hydrochloric acid solution in dioxane (2.5 ml, 10 mmol) was addedto a solution of compound 7 (0.55 g, 1.0 mmol) in acetonitrile (10 ml).The reaction mixture was heated at 50° C. for 16 hours. After cooling toroom temperature, the mixture was basified with a 1M aqueous solution ofsodium hydroxide (20 ml), diluted with water (100 ml) and extracted withdichloromethane (3×100 ml). The combined organic layers were dried oversodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. The desired residue waspurified by chromatography over silica gel (mobile phase, gradient from97% DCM, 3% MeOH to 85% DCM, 15% MeOH). Two product fractions werecollected and the solvent was evaporated, yielding 0.233 g (42%) ofunreacted started material (compound 7) and 0.204 g of fraction 2.

Fraction 2 was purified again by chromatography over silica gel (mobilephase, gradient from 98% DCM, 2% MeOH to 90% DCM, 10% MeOH). The desiredfractions were collected and the solvent was evaporated. The residue wastriturated in diethylether, filtered off and dried under vacuum,yielding 0.137 g of compound 10 (MP: 195° C., DSC).

Analogous preparation of compound 16 starting from compound 17

Analogous preparation of compound 19 starting from compound 18

Analogous preparation of compound 24 starting from compound 25

Analogous preparation of compound 34 starting from compound 33

Analogous preparation of compound 55 starting from compound 56

Analogous preparation of compound 59 starting from compound 60

Analogous preparation of compound 62 starting from compound 63

Analogous preparation of compound 65 starting from compound 64

Analogous preparation of compound 67 starting from compound 66

Analogous preparation of compound 72 starting from compound 71

Analogous preparation of compound 77 starting from compound 76

Example C2a

Preparation of Compound 39

HCl 4M in dioxane (4.3 mL; 17.2 mmol) was added dropwise to a solutionof compound 38 (0.473 g; 0.86 mmol) in ACN (8.6 mL). The mixture wasstirred at room temperature for 1 hour, at 50° C. overnight and wasallowed to cool to room temperature. A 1M aqueous solution of NaOH (80mL) and water (80 mL) were added (pH=14). The mixture was extracted withDCM (3×100 mL). The combined organic layers were washed with brine (100mL), dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residue (0.410 g,yellow gum) was purified by column chromatography over silica gel(eluent: EtOAc/MeOH 95/5 to 90/10). The product fractions were collectedand the solvent was evaporated. The resulting residue was triturated inEt₂O (4×5 mL) and dried under vacuum to give 0.254 g (67%, yellow solid)of compound 39 M.P.: 188° C. (DSC).

Example C3

Preparation of Compound 53

NaH (0.038 g; 0.94 mmol) was added to a suspension of compound 40 (0.287g; 0.63 mmol) in DMF (3 mL) at 0° C. The reaction mixture was stirred at0° C. for 1 hour, then iodomethane (0.058 mL; 0.94 mmol) was added at 0°C. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 1 h and at roomtemperature overnight. Water (50 mL) and brine (50 mL) were added andthe mixture was extracted with EtOAc (3×50 mL). The combined organiclayers were dried over Na₂SO₄, filtered and concentrated. The residue(0.600 g, yellow oil) was purified by column chromatography over silicagel (eluent: DCM/MeOH from 100/0 to 95/5). The fractions containingproduct were collected and the solvent was evaporated. The residue wastriturated in Et₂O. The precipitate was filtered and dried under vacuumto give 41 mg (14%, yellow solid) of compound 53. M.P.: 192° C. (DSC).

The following compounds were prepared according to reaction protocols ofone of the above Examples using alternative starting materials asappropriate.

In the tables A1 and A1a=CX (or =BX) indicates that the preparation ofthis compound is described in Conversion X (or Method BX).

In the tables A1 and A1a˜CX (or ˜BX) indicates that this compound isprepared according to Conversion X (or Method BX).

As understood by a person skilled in the art, compounds synthesisedusing the protocols as indicated may exist as a solvate e.g. hydrate,and/or contain residual solvent or minor impurities. Compounds isolatedas a salt form, may be integer stoichiometric i.e. mono- or di-salts, orof intermediate stoichiometry.

TABLE A1 compounds and physico-chemical data Melting (Kofler (K) HPLC MSLC/GC/ Comp. Compound Point or DSC Rt M+ MS No. Struct. Method (° C.) orBuchi) (min) (H⁺) method 1

=B1 166- 167° C. Buchi 12.57 406 2 3

=B2 138° C. DSC 10.92 420 3 6

=B3 − − 2.58 532 1 4

=B3 217° C. DSC 9.91 447 3 5

=B3 112° C. Kofler 2.36 447 1 10

=C2 195° C. DSC 11.9 442 2 7

=B4 80- 86° C. Buchi 13.84 549 2 2

~B1 154° C. DSC 12.83 420 2 8

=B5 188- 189° C. Buchi 13.97 400 2 11

=B6 167° C. DSC 11.85 454 3 9

=C1 — — — — —

TABLE A1a compounds and physico-chemical data Com- Melting (Kofler HPLCMS LC/GC/ pound Point (K) or RT M+ MS No. Compound Method (° C.) DSC)(min) (H⁺) method 14

=B4a 183 DSC 10.59 490 3 22

B1 173 DSC 10.54 456 3 65

C2 237 DSC 9.60 478 3 32

B4 176 DSC 10.65 532 3 35

B2 127° C. DSC 12.03 484 3 33

B3 204 DSC 11.17 617 3 29

B3b 105 K 2.29 465 1 30

=B3a 120 K 2.15 437 1 31

=B8 150 DSC 11.79 445 4 27

B4 182 DSC 10.63 472 3 16

C2 208 DSC 10.30 476 3 15

B6 165 DSC 10.47 440 3 23

B3a Gum at 60 K 2.31 423 1 13

B3a — — 2.4 461 1 12

B3a — — 2.52 475 1 21

=B3b 78 DSC 2.18 423 1 19

C2 246 DSC 9.13 418 3 24

C2 232 DSC 9.41 418 3 18

B4 164 DSC 10.87 525 3 26

B3a 130 K 2.27 483 1 34

C2 237 DSC 10.01 510 3 36

B2 120 DSC 11.78 466 3 37

B2a-4 >300 DSC 10.21 459 3 38

B4 192 DSC 13.77 549 4 39

=C2a 188 DSC 9.51 442 3 40

B2a-1 Decom- position from 211 DSC 10.32 477 3 41

=B2a-2 Decom- position from 276 DSC 10.24 459 3 42

=B2a-3 Decom- position from 233 DSC 10.39 495 3 43

=B2a-4 Decom- position from 221 DSC 10.32 477 3 44

B2a-4 Decom- position from 205 DSC 10.39 495 3 45

B2 179 DSC 11.46 482 3 46

=B2a-6 157 DSC 2.11 455 1 47

B7 212- 214 Buchi 9.17 443 3 48

=B7 216 DSC 9.21 461 3 49

B7 235 DSC 9.19 479 3 50

B2 139 DSC 10.98 446 3 51

B2 141 DSC 11.20 464 3 52

B2a-6 80, gum K 2.22 487 1 53

=C3 192 DSC 10.25 491 3 54

B2 230 DSC 9.62 437 3 55

C2 195 DSC 10.09 460 3 56

B4 Decom- position at 300 DSC 11.66 567 3 57

B2 155 DSC 11.01 447 3 58

B4 149 DSC 10.80 461 3 59

C2 242 DSC 8.84 439 3 60

B4 201 DSC 10.48 546 3 61

=B1a 209 Buchi- M-550 9.03 403 3 62

C2 222 DSC 8.99 439 3 63

B4 215 DSC 10.61 546 3 69

B2 198 DSC 11.65 420 3 68

B3a 163 DSC 10.62 447 3 66

B4 182 DSC 11.73 549 3 67

C2 210 DSC 10.10 442 3 70

=B2a-5 148 DSC 9.76 455 3 72

C2 234 DSC 9.80 478 3 71

B4 127 DSC 11.23 585 3 77

C2 230 DSC 9.99 460 3 76

B4 132 DSC 11.52 567 3 75

B9 151 DSC 10.80 438 3 74

=B9 200 DSC 10.54 424 3 73

B2a-6 172 DSC 9.90 437 3 20

=B3b 130- 134 K 2.38 423 1 28

B3b Gum at 70 K 2.37 465 1 64

B4 144 DSC 11.15 585 3 17

B4 25

B4 78

B9 153 DSC 10.05 438 3Analytical PartLC/GC/NMR

The LC/GC data reported in Table A1 were determined as follows.

General Procedure A

The LC measurement was performed using a UPLC (Ultra Performance LiquidChromatography) Acquity (Waters) system comprising a binary pump withdegasser, an autosampler, a diode-array detector (DAD) and a column asspecified in the respective methods below, the column is hold at atemperature of 40° C. Flow from the column was brought to a MS detector.The MS detector was configured with an electrospray ionization source.The capillary needle voltage was 3 kV and the source temperature wasmaintained at 130° C. on the Quattro (triple quadrupole massspectrometer from Waters). Nitrogen was used as the nebulizer gas. Dataacquisition was performed with a Waters-Micromass MassLynx-Openlynx datasystem.

Method I

In addition to the general procedure A: Reversed phase UPLC was carriedout on a Waters Acquity BEH (bridged ethylsiloxane/silica hybrid) C18column (1.7 μm, 2.1×100 mm) with a flow rate of 0.343 ml/min. Two mobilephases (mobile phase A: 95% 7 mM ammonium acetate/5% acetonitrile;mobile phase B: 100% acetonitrile) were employed to run a gradientcondition from 84.2% A and 15.8% B (hold for 0.49 minutes) to 10.5% Aand 89.5% B in 2.18 minutes, hold for 1.94 min and back to the initialconditions in 0.73 min, hold for 0.73 minutes. An injection volume of 2μl was used. Cone voltage was 20V for positive and negative ionizationmode. Mass spectra were acquired by scanning from 100 to 1000 in 0.2seconds using an interscan delay of 0.1 seconds.

General Procedure B

The HPLC measurement was performed using an HPLC 1100/1200 (Agilent)system comprising a quaternary pump with degasser, an autosampler, adiode-array detector (DAD) and a column as specified in the respectivemethods below, the column is held at a room temperature. The MS detector(MS-Agilent simple quadripole) was configured with an electrospray-APCIionization source. Nitrogen was used as the nebulizer gas. Dataacquisition was performed with a Chemstation data system.

Method 2

In addition to the general procedure B: Reversed phase HPLC was carriedout on a Nucleosil C18 column (3 μm, 3×150 mm) with a flow rate of 0.42ml/min. Two mobile phases (mobile phase A: Water TFA 0.1%; mobile phaseB: 100% acetonitrile) were employed to run a gradient condition from 98%A for 3 minutes, to 100% B in 12 minutes, 100% B for 5 minutes, thenback to 98% A in 2 minutes, and reequilibrated with 98% A for 6 minutes.An injection volume of 2 μl was used. The capillary voltage was 2 kV,the corona discharge was held at 1 μA and the source temperature wasmaintained at 250° C. A variable voltage was used for the fragmentor.Mass spectra were acquired in electrospray ionization and APCI inpositive mode, by scanning from 100 to 1100 amu.

Method 3

In addition to the general procedure B: Reversed phase HPLC was carriedout on a Agilent Eclipse C18 column (5 μm, 4.6×150 mm) with a flow rateof 1 ml/min. Two mobile phases (mobile phase A: Water TFA 0.1%; mobilephase B: 100% acetonitrile) were employed to run a gradient conditionfrom 98% A for 3 minutes, to 100% B in 12 minutes, 100% B for 5 minutes,then back to 98% A in 2 minutes, and reequilibrated with 98% A for 6minutes. An injection volume of 2 μl was used. The capillary voltage was2 kV, the corona discharge was held at 1 μA and the source temperaturewas maintained at 250° C. A variable voltage was used for thefragmentor. Mass spectra were acquired in electrospray ionization andAPCI in positive mode, by scanning from 80 to 1000 amu.

Method 4

In addition to the general procedure NOVA: Reversed phase HPLC wascarried out on a Agilent Eclipse C18 column (5 μm, 4.6×150 mm) with aflow rate of 1.0 ml/min. Two mobile phases (mobile phase A: Water with0.1% TFA; mobile phase B: 100% methanol) were employed to run a gradientcondition from 98% A held for 3 minutes to 100% B in 12 minutes, 100% Bfor 5 minutes, then back to 98% A in 2 minutes, and reequilibrated with98% A for 5 minutes. An injection volume of 2 μl was used. The capillaryvoltage was 2 kV, the corona discharge was held at 1 μA and the sourcetemperature was maintained at 250° C. A variable voltage was used forthe fragmentor. Mass spectra were acquired in electrospray ionizationand APCI in positive mode, by scanning from 100 to 1000 amu.

Melting point (M.P.) were taken with a Kofler hot bar or a Büchi MeltingPoint M-560 but also, for a number of compounds, they were determinedwith a DSC1 Star^(e) System (Mettler-Toledo). In this case, meltingpoints were measured with a temperature gradient of 5 or 10° C./minute.Maximum temperature was 350° C. Values are peak values.”

NMR Data

The below NMR experiments were carried out using a Bruker Avance 500 anda Bruker Avance DRX 400 spectrometers at ambient temperature, usinginternal deuterium lock and equipped with reverse triple-resonance (¹H,¹³C, ¹⁵N TXI) probe head for the 500 MHz and with reversedouble-resonance (¹H, ¹³C, SEI) probe head for the 400 MHz. Chemicalshifts (δ) are reported in parts per million (ppm).

Compound 11

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆): δ 8.80 (1H, s), 8.47 (1H, s), 8.13 (1H, s),7.95 (1H, d, J=9.4 Hz), 6.87 (d, 1H, J=9.4 Hz), 6.55-6.53 (3H, m), 4.50(1H, t, J=5.2 Hz), 4.17 (2H, t, J=7.2 Hz), 3.96 (3H, s), 3.77 (6H, s),3.53 (2H, q, J=6.0 Hz), 1.87 (2H, qt, J=6.7 Hz).

Compound 4

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d6) δ 9.07 (br.s, 1H), 8.91 (br.s, 2H), 8.48 (s,1H), 8.43 (br.s, 1H), 8.15 (s, 1H), 8.10 (d, J=9.4 Hz, 1H), 6.92 (d,J=9.4 Hz, 1H), 6.72 (d, J=2.2 Hz, 2H), 6.59 (t, J=2.2 Hz, 1H), 4.35 (t,J=6.6 Hz, 2H), 3.94 (s, 3H), 3.78 (s, 6H), 3.45 (spt, J=6.2 Hz, 1H),3.26 (quin, J=6.6 Hz, 2H), 1.28 (d, J=6.2 Hz, 6H).

Compound 30

¹H NMR (500 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ (ppm) 8.91 (d, J=1.9 Hz, 1H), 8.46 (s, 1H),8.15 (s, 1H), 8.11 (d, J=1.9 Hz, 1H), 7.95 (d, J=9.5 Hz, 1H), 6.76-6.82(m, 1H), 6.66-6.72 (m, 2H), 4.09 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 2H), 3.90 (s, 1H), 3.88(s, 1H), 3.78 (s, 3H), 2.78 (t, J=6.8 Hz, 2H), 2.31 (s, 3H)

Compound 31

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 8.86 (s, 1H), 8.47 (s, 1H), 8.16 (s, 1H),8.09 (s, 1H), 7.85 (d, J=9.3 Hz, 1H), 6.64 (br. s., 1H), 6.32-6.45 (m,3H), 5.01-5.21 (m, 1H), 3.91 (s, 3H), 3.78 (s, 6H), 3.01 (d, J=11.9 Hz,2H), 2.66 (d, J=13.4 Hz, 2H), 1.90 (d, J=11.9 Hz, 2H), 1.20-1.39 (m, 3H)

Compound 39

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 11.46-11.97 (m, 1H), 8.80-9.04 (m, 1H), 8.47(s, 1H), 8.07-8.29 (m, 2H), 7.78-8.00 (m, 1H), 7.43-7.60 (m, 1H), 7.05(s, 1H), 6.80-6.99 (m, 1H), 6.60-6.79 (m, 2H), 6.34-6.52 (m, 1H),5.09-5.30 (m, 2H), 3.91 (s, 3H), 3.74 (s, 6H)

Compound 40

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 8.94 (s, 1H), 8.47 (s, 1H), 8.16 (br. s.,2H), 7.98 (d, J=9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.78 (s, 1H), 6.81 (br. s., 2H), 6.69 (d,J=9.1 Hz, 1H), 4.11 (br. s., 2H), 3.85-3.96 (m, 7H), 3.79 (s, 3H),2.21-2.32 (m, 1H), 2.03-2.17 (m, 2H), 1.85 (br. s., 1H)

Compound 41

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 8.90 (s, 1H), 8.45 (s, 1H), 8.19-8.08 (m,2H), 7.92 (d, J=9.3 Hz, 1H), 7.81 (s, 1H), 6.77 (d, J=9.3 Hz, 1H), 6.66(s, 2H), 6.53 (br. s., 1H), 4.17-4.29 (m, 1H), 4.06-4.16 (m, 1H),3.87-3.98 (m, 4H), 3.78 (s, 6H), 2.21-2.32 (m, 1H), 2.04-2.18 (m, 2H),1.73-1.89 (m, 1H)

Compound 42

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 8.98 (s, 1H), 8.48 (s, 1H), 8.17 (s, 2H),8.05 (d, J=9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.56 (s, 1H), 7.07-7.20 (m, 1H), 6.51-6.91 (m,1H), 4.11-4.26 (m, 1H), 3.99-4.06 (m, 1H), 3.88-3.97 (m, 9H), 3.79-3.87(m, 1H), 2.20-2.32 (m, 1H), 2.01-2.18 (m, 2H), 1.84-1.99 (m, 1H)

Compound 43

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 8.94 (s, 1H), 8.47 (s, 1H), 8.16 (s, 2H),7.98 (d, J=9.1 Hz, 1H), 7.78 (s, 1H), 6.81 (br. s., 2H), 6.69 (d, J=9.1Hz, 1H), 4.04-4.25 (m, 2H), 3.85-3.97 (m, 7H), 3.79 (s, 3H), 2.19-2.31(m, 1H), 2.03-2.16 (m, 2H), 1.76-1.93 (m, 1H)

Compound 48

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 13.82 (br. s., 1H), 8.95 (s, 1H), 8.46 (s,1H), 8.21-8.34 (m, 1H), 8.15 (s, 2H), 8.02 (d, J=9.3 Hz, 1H), 6.82 (d,J=9.3 Hz, 1H), 6.68-6.78 (m, 2H), 5.35 (br. s., 2H), 3.91 (s, 3H), 3.88(s, 3H), 3.73 (s, 3H)

Compound 70

¹H NMR (400 MHz, DMSO-d₆) δ 9.03-8.87 (m, 2H), 8.43 (br. s., 1H), 8.24(br. s., 1H), 8.10 (br. s., 1H), 6.93-7.17 (m, 1H), 6.67 (br. s., 1H),3.71-4.06 (m, 12H), 2.84 (br. s., 2H), 2.37 (s, 3H)

Pharmacological Part

Biological Assays a

FGFR1 (Enzymatic Assay)

In a final reaction volume of 30 μL, FGFR1 (h) (25 ng/ml) was incubatedwith 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6 mM MnCl₂, 1 mM DTT, 0.1 mM Na₃VO₄, 0.01%Triton-X-100, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 5 μM ATP in the presence of compound(1% DMSO final). After incubation for 60 minutes at room temperature thereaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P-Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nMSA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at roomtemperature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer(TR-FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measuredafterwards and results are expressed in RFU (Relative FluorescenceUnits). In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compoundconcentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used tocalculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value.

FGFR2 (Enzymatic Assay)

In a final reaction volume of 30 μL, FGFR2 (h) (150 ng/ml) was incubatedwith 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6 mM MnCl₂, 1 mM DTT, 0.1 mM Na₃VO₄, 0.01%Triton-X-100, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 0.4 μM ATP in the presence of compound(1% DMSO final). After incubation for 60 minutes at room temperature thereaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P-Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nMSA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at roomtemperature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer(TR-FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measuredafterwards and results are expressed in (Relative Fluorescence Units).In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compoundconcentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used tocalculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value.

FGFR3 (Enzymatic Assay)

In a final reaction volume of 30 μL, FGFR3 (h) (40 ng/ml) was incubatedwith 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6 mM MnCl₂, 1 mM DTT, 0.1 mM Na₃VO₄, 0.01%Triton-X-100, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 25 μM ATP in the presence of compound(1% DMSO final). After incubation for 60 minutes at room temperature thereaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P-Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nMSA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at roomtemperature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer(TR-FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measuredafterwards and results are expressed in RFU (Relative FluorescenceUnits). In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compoundconcentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used tocalculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value.

FGFR4 (Enzymatic Assay)

In a final reaction volume of 30 μL, FGFR4 (h) (60 ng/ml) was incubatedwith 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6 mM MnCl₂, 1 mM DTT, 0.1 mM Na₃VO₄, 0.01%Triton-X-100, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 5 μM ATP in the presence of compound(1% DMSO final). After incubation for 60 minutes at room temperature thereaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P-Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nMSA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at roomtemperature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer(TR-FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measuredafterwards and results are expressed in RFU (Relative FluorescenceUnits). In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compoundconcentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used tocalculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value.

KDR (VEGFR2) (Enzymatic Assay)

In a final reaction volume of 30 μL, KDR (h) (150 ng/ml) was incubatedwith 50 mM HEPES pH 7.5, 6 mM MnCl₂, 1 mM DTT, 0.1 mM Na₃VO₄, 0.01%Triton-X-100, 500 nM Btn-Flt3 and 3 μM ATP in the presence of compound(1% DMSO final). After incubation for 120 minutes at room temperaturethe reaction was stopped with 2.27 nM EU-anti P-Tyr, 7 mM EDTA, 31.25 nMSA-XL-665 and 0.02% BSA which was present for 60 minutes at roomtemperature. Time-Resolved Fluorescence Resonance Energy Transfer(TR-FRET) signal (ex340 nm. Em 620 nm, em 655 nm) was measuredafterwards and results are expressed in RFU (Relative FluorescenceUnits). In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compoundconcentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used tocalculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value.

Ba/F3-FGFR1 (Minus IL3 or Plus IL3) (Cellular Proliferation Assay)

In a 384 well plate, 100 nl of compound dilution in DMSO was sprayedbefore adding 50 μl cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMI-1640, 10%FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 μg/ml Gentamycin) containing 20000 cellsper well of Ba/F3-FGFR1-transfected cells. Cells were put in anincubator at 37° C. and 5% CO₂. After 24 hours, 10 μl of Alamar Bluesolution (0.5 mM K₃Fe(CN)₆, 0.5 mM K₄Fe(CN)₆, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at37° C. and 5% CO₂ before RFU's (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader.

In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compoundconcentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used tocalculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value. As a counterscreenthe same experiment was performed in the presence of 10 ng/ml murineIL3.

Ba/F3-FGFR3 (Minus IL3 or Plus IL3) (Cellular Proliferation Assay)

In a 384 well plate, 100 nl of compound dilution in DMSO was sprayedbefore adding 50 μl cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMI-1640, 10%FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 μg/ml Gentamycin) containing 20000 cellsper well of Ba/F3-FGFR3-transfected cells. Cells were put in anincubator at 37° C. and 5% CO₂. After 24 hours, 10 μl of Alamar Bluesolution (0.5 mM K₃Fe(CN)₆, 0.5 mM K₄Fe(CN)₆, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at37° C. and 5% CO₂ before RFU's (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader.

In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compoundconcentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used tocalculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value. As a counterscreenthe same experiment was performed in the presence of 10 ng/ml murineIL3.

Ba/F3-KDR (Minus IL3 or Plus IL3) (Cellular Proliferation Assay)

In a 384 well plate, 100 nl of compound dilution in DMSO was sprayedbefore adding 50 μl cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMI-1640, 10%FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 μg/ml Gentamycin) containing 20000 cellsper well of Ba/F3-KDR-transfected cells. Cells were put in an incubatorat 37° C. and 5% CO₂. After 24 hours, 10 μl of Alamar Blue solution (0.5mM K₃Fe(CN)₆, 0.5 mM K₄Fe(CN)₆, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM PhosphateBuffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37° C. and 5%CO₂ before RFU's (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader.

In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compoundconcentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used tocalculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value. As a counterscreenthe same experiment was performed in the presence of 10 ng/ml murineIL3.

Ba/F3-Flt3 (Minus IL3 or Plus IL3) (Cellular Proliferation Assay)

In a 384 well plate, 100 nl of compound dilution in DMSO was sprayedbefore adding 50 μl cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMI-1640, 10%FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 μg/ml Gentamycin) containing 20000 cellsper well of Ba/F3-Flt3-transfected cells. Cells were put in an incubatorat 37° C. and 5% CO₂. After 24 hours, 10 μl of Alamar Blue solution (0.5mM K₃Fe(CN)₆, 0.5 mM K₄Fe(CN)₆, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100 mM PhosphateBuffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at 37° C. and 5%CO₂ before RFU's (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540 nm., em. 590nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader.

In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compoundconcentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used tocalculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value. As a counterscreenthe same experiment was performed in the presence of 10 ng/ml murineIL3.

Ba/F3-FGFR4 (Cellular Proliferation Assay)

In a 384 well plate, 100 nl of compound dilution in DMSO was sprayedbefore adding 50 μl cell culture medium (phenol red free RPMI-1640, 10%FBS, 2 mM L-Glutamine and 50 μg/ml Gentamycin) containing 20000 cellsper well of Ba/F3-FGFR4-transfected cells. Cells were put in anincubator at 37° C. and 5% CO₂. After 24 hours, 10 μl of Alamar Bluesolution (0.5 mM K₃Fe(CN)₆, 0.5 mM K₄Fe(CN)₆, 0.15 mM Resazurin and 100mM Phosphate Buffer) was added to the wells, incubated for 4 hours at37° C. and 5% CO₂ before RFU's (Relative Fluorescence Units) (ex. 540nm., em. 590 nm.) were measured in a flurorescence plate reader.

In this assay, the inhibitory effect of different compoundconcentrations (range 10 μM to 0.1 nM) was determined and used tocalculate an IC₅₀ (M) and pIC₅₀ (−log IC₅₀) value.

Data for the compounds of the invention in the above assays are providedin Table A2 and A2a.

TABLE A2 (If data were generated multiple times for a compound ordifferent batches were tested, average values are reported) BAF3- BAF3-BAF3- BAF3- BAF3- BAF3- BAF3- BAF3_(—) FGFR1 FGFR1 FGFR3 FGFR3 KDR KDRFLT3 FLT3 FGFR FGFR FGFR FGFR VEGFR (MIN (PLUS (MIN (PLUS (MIN (PLUS(MIN (PLUS BAF3- Co. 1 2 3 4 2 (KDR) IL3) IL3) IL3) IL3) IL3) IL3) IL3)IL3) FGFR4 No. pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ 1 8.6 8.5 9.0 8.1 7.5 7.4 <5 ~7.7 <5 5.9<5 5.05 <5 7.1 3 8.7 8.6 8.8 8.2 7.3 6.9 <5 7.0 <5 5.3 <5 <5 <5 6.4 68.7 8.3 8.4 8.1 7.3 7.1 5.2 7.0 5.2 5.9 5.1 5.3 5.0 6.8 4 8.9 8.4 8.58.3 7.5 8.25 <5 8.0 <5 5.9 <5 5.1 <5 7.6~7.7 5 8.7 8.3 8.2 7.9 7.2 7.3<5 7.2 <5 5.6 <5 <5 <5 6.6 10 9.3 8.8 9.2 9.0 7.7 8.2 <5 8.2 <5 5.8 <5<5 <5 ~7.5 2 8.9 8.5 9.2 8.7 7.7 7.4 <5 7.4 <5 5.8 <5 <5 <5 6.9 7 9.08.4 8.7 8.0 7.3 7.0 <5 6.7 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 5.9 8 8.5 8.4 8.8 8.0 7.1 6.5<5 <5 5.1 <5 <5 <5 5.9 11 9.1 9.9 9.3 8.7 7.8 6.7

TABLE A2a (If data were generated multiple times for a compound ordifferent batches were tested, average values are reported) BAF3- BAF3-BAF3- BAF3- BAF3- BAF3- BAF3- BAF3_(—) FGFR1 FGFR1 FGFR3 FGFR3 KDR KDRFLT3 FLT3 FGFR FGFR FGFR FGFR VEGFR (MIN (PLUS (MIN (PLUS (MIN (PLUS(MIN (PLUS BAF3- Co. 1 2 3 4 2 (KDR) IL3) IL3) IL3) IL3) IL3) IL3) IL3)IL3) FGFR 4 No. pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ pIC₅₀ 64 8.53 8.11 8.45 8.54 7.46 ~8.2 6.09 7.865.62 6.53 5.75 5.61 5.54 ~7.55 14 7.77 7.71 8.27 7.96 6.96 7.77 5.327.66 5.03 5.83 5.05 5.11 <5 7.13 22 8.31 8.14 8.78 8.84 7.49 8.61 <58.36 <5 6.87 <5 5.41 <5 8.03 65 8.74 8.43 8.89 8.94 7.76 8.75 5.35 ~8.49<5 6.37 5.02 5.45 5.11 ~8.2 26 9.01 8.43 8.63 8.52 7.76 >9.27 5.26 8.54<5 7.05 <5 — — 8.36 18 7.55 7.89 6.98 6.82 6.81 6.59 5.53 5.89 5.26 5.085.06 — — 5.72 24 7.64 8.05 8.02 7.54 6.73 6.13 <5 ~6.17 <5 5.04 <5 — —5.80 19 7.65 7.88 7.78 7.36 6.83 6.39 5.19 6.10 <5 5.16 <5 — — 5.93 207.41 7.51 7.32 6.92 6.48 6.46 5.22 6.22 <5 5.04 <5 — — 6.00 21 8.53 8.478.30 7.95 6.91 7.28 5.14 ~7.16 <5 5.56 <5 — — 6.71 12 8.72 8.43 8.478.30 7.78 8.22 <5 7.89 <5 6.43 <5 — — 7.53 13 8.89 8.49 8.45 8.20 7.748.29 <5 7.82 <5 6.36 <5 — — 7.54 23 7.60 8.02 7.67 7.27 6.21 6.36 <56.15 <5 5.08 <5 — — 6.22 15 9.14 9.12 9.26 8.61 8.05 7.48 <5 5.80 <55.67 <5 — — 6.60 16 9.35 8.89 9.24 8.99 8.23 7.75 <5 7.35 <5 5.87 <5 — —7.20 27 8.87 8.52 8.73 8.41 7.50 7.66 <5 6.90 <5 5.71 <5 <5 <5 6.77 319.17 8.66 8.57 8.48 7.92 8.60 <5 8.35 <5 7.16 <5 — — 8.10 67 6.64 7.117.49 6.61 <6 5.05 <5 5.22 <5 <5 <5 — — <5 66 6.86 6.39 6.31 ~5.35 <6 <5<5 <5 <5 <5 <5 — — <5 30 8.92 8.44 8.46 8.30 7.64 7.93 <5 7.78 <5 6.56<5 — — 7.44 29 8.96 8.47 8.42 8.34 7.72 8.56 <5 8.62 <5 6.82 <5 — — 8.1028 8.57 8.09 8.04 8.18 7.34 7.81 <5 7.77 <5 6.20 <5 — — 7.23 69 <6 <6~6.04 5.35 <6 5.09 <5 <5 <5 <5 <5 — — <5 68 6.89 6.93 6.76 6.11 <6 5.33<5 5.47 <5 <5 <5 — — 5.15 33 8.65 8.06 8.14 7.44 7.31 7.38 <5 7.12 <55.77 <5 — — 5.94 35 8.81 8.36 8.56 8.72 7.91 7.63 <5 ~8 <5 5.98 <5 — —6.90 32 8.30 8.30 8.38 7.80 7.45 6.25 <5 6.14 <5 5.33 <5 — — 5.60 348.89 8.43 8.68 8.08 7.84 7.40 <5 7.42 <5 6.16 <5 — — 6.42 40 8.84 8.678.76 8.64 8.10 7.55 <5 ~7.6 <5 6.31 <5 — — 7.00 39 9.45 9.22 9.14 9.048.27 8.00 <5 ~8.08 <5 5.82 ~5.09 — — 7.31 38 8.37 8.65 8.47 8.24 7.356.65 <5 ~6.58 <5 5.41 <5 — — 6.30 37 8.63 8.54 8.74 8.31 7.43 7.10 <5~7.15 <5 5.47 <5 — — ~6.49 36 8.70 8.52 8.55 8.45 7.74 7.06 <5 7.20 <55.50 <5 — — 6.45 41 8.57 8.73 8.87 8.36 7.82 7.13 <5 ~7.22 <5 5.60 <5 —— 6.35 44 9.01 8.68 8.85 9.00 8.05 8.22 <5 ~8.08 <5 6.31 <5 — — 7.59 438.97 8.73 8.83 8.73 7.67 7.59 <5 7.77 <5 5.71 <5 — — 6.94 42 9.02 8.718.80 8.92 8.23 8.12 <5 ~8.11 <5 6.91 <5 — — 7.74 46 9.04 8.74 8.81 8.657.97 8.50 <5 ~8.55 <5 6.84 <5 — — 7.99 45 8.94 8.55 8.70 8.65 7.99 7.64<5 7.67 <5 6.64 <5 — — 7.13 47 8.84 8.84 9.16 8.82 7.70 7.16 <5 ~7.63 <5~6.01 <5 — — 6.81 48 8.87 8.68 8.95 8.96 7.87 7.71 <5 ~7.9 <5 6.13 <5 —— 7.06 49 8.68 8.50 8.84 9.03 7.99 8.18 <5 8.15 <5 6.65 <5 — — 7.66 508.56 8.54 8.59 8.06 7.40 6.69 <5 6.54 <5 5.23 <5 — — 5.96 51 8.30 8.338.59 8.24 7.41 7.12 <5 ~7.13 <5 5.48 <5 — — ~6.54 70 7.90 7.95 7.77 7.386.74 7.10 <5 ~7.06 <5 5.29 <5 — — 6.36 53 8.20 8.42 8.39 7.88 7.72 6.77<5 6.80 <5 5.70 <5 — — 6.30 71 7.84 7.82 7.59 7.08 6.77 6.34 <5 6.27 <5<5 <5 — — 5.71 72 8.28 8.45 8.60 8.09 6.71 6.21 <5 6.39 <5 <5 <5 — —5.95 52 8.60 8.10 8.17 7.35 6.98 7.26 <5 6.85 <5 5.71 <5 — — 6.36 737.26 7.30 7.14 6.45 <6 6.10 <5 ~6.14 <5 <5 <5 — — 5.56 74 7.21 7.25 7.446.56 ~6.04 5.62 <5 5.60 <5 <5 <5 — — 5.17 75 7.09 7.13 7.44 6.66 <6 5.62<5 5.39 <5 <5 <5 — — 5.01 76 7.46 7.24 6.88 6.06 <6 5.46 <5 5.54 <5 <5<5 — — <5 77 7.56 7.86 8.01 7.25 <6 5.55 <5 5.67 <5 <5 <5 — — 5.11 548.44 8.15 8.55 7.82 7.27 6.03 <5 ~6.8 <5 5.63 <5 — — 6.09 56 8.67 8.258.15 8.21 7.31 6.96 <5 ~7.11 <5 5.97 <5 — — 6.91 58 9.07 8.66 8.63 8.207.66 7.35 ~5 7.61 <5 5.71 <5 — — 6.76 63 8.58 8.41 7.94 7.34 6.85 6.23<5 6.11 <5 <5 <5 — — 5.48 62 9.07 8.84 8.81 8.44 7.30 7.47 <5 7.69 <55.20 <5 — — 6.84 57 9.26 8.84 8.92 8.92 8.14 7.77 <5 ~8.16 <5 6.21 <5 —— 7.30 61 8.45 8.53 8.84 7.93 7.11 6.53 <5 ~7.05 <5 5.16 <5 — — 6.18 559.38 8.85 8.93 8.83 8.24 7.76 ~5 ~8.06 <5 6.21 <5 — — 7.37 60 8.51 8.318.09 7.13 6.80 5.63 <5 5.72 <5 <5 <5 — — 5.05 59 8.87 8.81 8.74 8.407.09 7.55 <5 ~7.53 <5 5.37 <5 — — 6.64

The invention claimed is:
 1. A method for treating a subject sufferingfrom or being at risk of suffering from a disease state or conditionselected from: a carcinoma of the bladder, breast, colon, kidney,epidermis, liver, lung, oesophagus, head and neck, gall bladder, ovary,pancreas, stomach, cervix, endometrium, thyroid, prostate, or skin;gastrointestinal cancer: a hematopoietic tumour of lymphoid lineage; ahematopoietic tumour of myeloid lineage; multiple myeloma; thyroidfollicular cancer; a tumour of mesenchymal origin; a tumour of thecentral or peripheral nervous system: melanoma; seminoma;teratocarcinoma; osteosarcoma; xeroderma pigmentosum; keratoctanthoma;Kaposi's sarcoma: myeloproliferative disorders; colorectal cancer;squamous cell carcinoma; and oral squamous cell carcinoma, said methodcomprising administering to the subject a compound selected from thegroup consisting of a compound of formula (I-A) or (I-B)

a tautomeric form, stereochemically isomeric form, and isotopic formthereof, wherein X¹ is N and X² is CR^(3a), or X² is N and X¹ isCR^(3a); each R² is independently selected from hydroxyl, halogen,cyano, C₁₋₄alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl, C₂₋₄alkynyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy,hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy, haloC₁₋₄alkyl, haloC₁₋₄alkoxy,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxy, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl,haloC₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl wherein each C₁₋₄alkyl mayoptionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with R¹³,C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with R¹³,C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with —C(═O)—R¹³, —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkylsubstituted with —NR⁷R⁸, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸,C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with —NR⁷R⁸, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with—C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸, —NR⁷R⁸ and —C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸; or when two R² groups areattached to adjacent carbon atoms they may be taken together to form aradical of formula: —O—(C(R¹⁷)₂)_(p)—O—; —X—CH═CH—; or —X—CH═N—; whereinR¹⁷ represents hydrogen or fluorine, p represents 1 or 2 and Xrepresents O or S; Y represents —CR¹⁸═N—OR¹⁹ or -E-D; D represents a 3to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a 3 to 12 ringmembered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least oneheteroatom selected from N, O and S, wherein said carbocyclyl andheterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1,2 or 3) R¹ groups; E represents a bond, —(CR²²R²³)_(n)—, C₂₋₄alkenediyloptionally substituted with R²², C₂₋₄alkynediyl optionally substitutedwith R²², —CO—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—, —(CR²²R²³)_(s)—CO—, —NR²²—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—,—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—NR²²—, —O—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—, —(CR²²R²³)_(s)—O—,—S(O)_(m)—(CR²²R²³)_(s), —(CR²²R²³)_(s)—S(O)_(m)—,—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—CO—NR²²—(CR²²R²³)_(s)— or—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—NR²²—CO—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—; R¹ represents hydrogen, halo,cyano, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl,hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl,C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substitutedwith one or two hydroxyl groups, —NR⁴R⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR⁴R⁵, —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵,—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl-NR⁴R⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵,—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, —C(═O)—R⁶,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁶, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl substituted withR⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—P(═O)(OH)₂ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂; R^(3a)represents hydrogen, chlorine, hydroxyl, or C₁₋₆alkoxy; R³ representshydroxyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkoxy substituted with—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl optionallysubstituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl optionallysubstituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₂₋₆alkenyl,hydroxyC₂₋₆alkynyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-O—C(═O)—, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted withC₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-C(═O)—, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl mayoptionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with—O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₂₋₆alkynylsubstituted with C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹ andoptionally substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —C(═O)—R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R⁹, C₂₋₆alkenylsubstituted with R⁹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹,C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted withhydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with one or two halogensand —NR¹⁰R¹¹, —C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹², C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹,—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆ alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R¹³, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OH)₂ orC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂; R⁴ and R⁵ eachindependently represent hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹⁴R¹⁵ hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substitutedwith one or two hydroxyl groups, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl,—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,—C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —C(═O)—R³, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,R¹³ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R¹³; R⁶ represents C₃₋₈cycloalkyl,C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, phenyl, 4 to 7-membered monocyclic heterocyclylcontaining at least one heteroatom selected from N, O and S; saidC₃₋₈cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, phenyl, 4 to 7-membered monocyclicheterocyclyl, optionally and each independently being substituted by 1,2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents, each substituent independently being selectedfrom cyano, C₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl,hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, halogen, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl-O—C(═O)—, —NR¹⁴R¹⁵,—C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl,—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl and C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵; R⁷ and R⁸ each independently represent hydrogen,C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl orC₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl; R⁹ represents C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl,phenyl, naphthyl, or 3 to 12 membered monocyclic or bicyclicheterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O andS, said C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, phenyl, naphthyl, or 3 to 12membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl each optionally and eachindependently being substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents, eachsubstituent independently being selected from ═O, C₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyl,carboxyl, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, cyano, cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkyl-O—C(═O)—,C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with C₁₋₄alkyl-O—C(═O)—, C₁₋₄alkyl-C(═O)—,C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl wherein each C₁₋₄alkyl may optionally be substitutedwith one or two hydroxyl groups, halogen, haloC₁₋₄alkyl,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkyl, —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkyl substitutedwith —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkoxy,—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₄alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₄alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkylsubstituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,R¹³, —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with R¹³, phenyl optionallysubstituted with R¹⁶, phenylC₁₋₆alkyl wherein the phenyl is optionallysubstituted with R¹⁶, a 5 or 6-membered aromatic monocyclic heterocyclylcontaining at least one heteroatom selected from N, O and S wherein saidheterocyclyl is optionally substituted with R¹⁶; or when two of thesubstituents of R⁹ are attached to the same atom, they may be takentogether to form a 4 to 7-membered saturated monocyclic heterocyclylcontaining at least one heteroatom selected from N, O and S; R¹⁰ and R¹¹each independently represent hydrogen, carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl,cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein eachC₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups,R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, —C(═O)—R⁶, —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl,—C(═O)-hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, —C(═O)-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,—C(═O)-hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃,—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with carboxyl, orC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵; R¹² represents hydrogenor C₁₋₄alkyl optionally substituted with C₁₋₄alkoxy; R¹³ representsC₃₋₈cycloalkyl or a saturated 4 to 6-membered monocyclic heterocyclylcontaining at least one heteroatom selected from N, O and S, whereinsaid C₃₋₈cycloalkyl or monocyclic heterocyclyl is optionally substitutedwith 1, 2 or 3 substituents each independently selected from halogen,hydroxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, ═O, cyano, —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkoxy, and —NR¹⁴R¹⁵; R¹⁴ and R¹⁵ each independently representhydrogen, or haloC₁₋₄alkyl, or C₁₋₄alkyl optionally substituted with asubstituent selected from hydroxyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, amino and mono- ordi(C₁₋₄alkyl)amino; R¹⁶ represents hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, C₁₋₄alkyl,C₁₋₄alkoxy, —NR¹⁴R¹⁵ or —C(═O)NR¹⁴R¹⁵; R¹⁸ represents hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl; R¹⁹represents hydrogen; C₁₋₆alkyl; C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl; C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —O—R²⁰; —(CH₂)_(r)—CN; —(CH₂)_(r)—CONR²⁰R²¹; —(CH₂)_(r1)—NR²⁰R²¹;—(CH₂)_(r1)—NR²⁰COR²¹; —(CH₂)_(r1)—NR²⁰—(CH₂)_(s)—SO₂—R²¹;—(CH₂)_(r1)—NH—SO₂—NR²⁰R²¹; —(CH₂)_(r1)—NR²⁰CO₂R²¹;—(CH₂)_(r)—SO₂NR²⁰R²¹; phenyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or5 substituents each independently selected from halogen, C₁₋₄alkyl,C₁₋₄alkyloxy, cyano and amino; a 5- or 6-membered aromatic monocyclicheterocycle containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O and S,said heterocycle being optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3 or 4substituents each independently selected from halogen, C₁₋₄alkyl,C₁₋₄alkyloxy, cyano and amino; wherein said C₁₋₆ alkyl and C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, may be optionally substituted by one or more R²⁰ groups R²⁰and R²¹ independently represent hydrogen, C₁₋₆ alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl,—(CH₂)_(n)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, or when attached to a nitrogen atom R²⁰ and R²¹can be taken together to form with the nitrogen atom to which they areattached a monocyclic saturated 4, 5 or 6-membered ring which optionallycontains a further heteroatom selected from O, S and N; R²² and R²³independently represent hydrogen, C₁₋₆ alkyl, or hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl; mindependently represents an integer equal to 0, 1 or 2; n independentlyrepresents an integer equal to 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; s independentlyrepresents an integer equal to 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; r independentlyrepresent an integer equal to 1, 2, 3, or 4; r1 independently representan integer equal to 2, 3 or 4; or an N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
 2. A method according toclaim 1 wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of acompound of formula (I-A), a tautomeric form, stereochemically isomericform, and isotopic form thereof, or an N-oxide thereof, apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
 3. Amethod according to claim 2 wherein the compound is selected from thegroup consisting of a compound of formula (I-A), a tautomeric form,stereochemically isomeric form, and isotopic form thereof, wherein X¹ isN, X² is CR^(3a), or an N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptablesalt thereof or a solvate thereof.
 4. A method according to claim 2wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of a compoundof formula (I-A), a tautomeric form, stereochemically isomeric form, andisotopic form thereof, wherein X² is N and X¹ is CR^(3a), or an N-oxidethereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvatethereof.
 5. A method according to claim 1 wherein the compound isselected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I-B), atautomeric form, stereochemically isomeric form, and isotopic formthereof, or an N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable saltthereof or a solvate thereof.
 6. A method according to claim 1 whereinthe compound is selected from the group consisting of a compound offormula (I-A) or (I-B), a tautomeric form, stereochemically isomericform, and isotopic form thereof, wherein Y represents —CR¹⁸═N—OR¹⁹, oran N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or asolvate thereof.
 7. A method according to claim 1 wherein the compoundis selected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I-A) or(I-B), a tautomeric form, stereochemically isomeric form, and isotopicform thereof, wherein Y is -E-D, or an N-oxide thereof, apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
 8. Amethod according to claim 1 wherein the compound is selected from thegroup consisting of a compound of formula (I-A) or (I-B), a tautomericform, stereochemically isomeric form, and isotopic form thereof, whereinE represents (i) a bond, C₂₋₄alkenediyl, —CO—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—,—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—CO—, —NR²²—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—, —(CR²²R²³)_(s)—NR²²—,—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—CO—NR²²—(CR²²R²³)_(s)— or—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—NR²²—CO—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—; or (ii) a bond, or an N-oxidethereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvatethereof.
 9. A method according to claim 7 wherein the compound isselected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I-A) or(I-B), a tautomeric form, stereochemically isomeric form, and isotopicform thereof, wherein D is optionally substituted pyrazolyl, or anN-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvatethereof.
 10. A method according to claim 1 wherein the compound isselected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I-A) or(I-B), a tautomeric form, stereochemically isomeric form, and isotopicform thereof, wherein R²: (i) is independently selected from hydroxyl,halogen, cyano, C₁₋₄alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl,hydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy, haloC₁₋₄alkoxy, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, R¹³, C₁₋₄alkoxysubstituted with R¹³, —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with NR⁷R⁸,C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with NR⁷R⁸, —NR⁷R⁸ and —C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸; or (ii)represents C₁₋₄alkyloxy; or (iii) represents C₁₋₄alkyloxy or fluoro, oran N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or asolvate thereof.
 11. A method according to claim 1 wherein the compoundis selected from the group consisting of a compound of formula (I-A) or(I-B), a tautomeric form, stereochemically isomeric form, and isotopicform thereof, wherein R³ represents: (i) C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl mayoptionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with hydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with oneor two halogens and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R⁹, —C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹²,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—R⁹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy,C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl or R¹³; or (ii) hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl,cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₂₋₆alkynyl or R¹³, or an N-oxide thereof, apharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
 12. Amethod according to claim 11 wherein the compound is selected from thegroup consisting of a compound of formula (I-A) or (I-B), a tautomericform, stereochemically isomeric form, and isotopic form thereof, whereinR³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl, orC₂₋₆alkynyl, or an N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceutically acceptable saltthereof or a solvate thereof.
 13. A method according to claim 1 whereinthe compound is selected from the group consisting of a compound offormula (I-A) or (I-B), a tautomeric form, stereochemically isomericform, and isotopic form thereof, wherein R^(3a) represents (i) hydrogenor chlorine, or (ii) hydrogen, or an N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
 14. A method according toclaim 1 wherein the compound is selected from the group consisting of acompound of formula (I-A) or (I-B), a tautomeric form, stereochemicallyisomeric form, and isotopic form thereof, wherein: (i) X² represents Nand X¹ represent CH, n represents an integer equal to 2; and each R²represents C₁₋₄alkoxy, for example CH₃O—; R³ representshydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl; Yrepresents -E-D wherein E represents a bond and D represents pyrazolylsubstituted with C₁₋₆alkyl; R¹⁰ and R¹¹ represent hydrogen or C₁₋₆alkyl;R⁹ represents an optionally substituted 5 membered aromatic heterocycle,such as for example optionally substituted imidazolyl; or (ii) X¹represents N and X² represents CH or X¹ represents CH and X² representsN; n represents an integer equal to 2, 3 or 4; and each R² representsC₁₋₄alkoxy, for example CH₃O—, or halo, for example fluoro or chloro;R^(3a) represents hydrogen or chlorine; R³ represents hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl,cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₂₋₆alkynyl or R¹³; Y represents -E-D wherein Erepresents a bond and D represents an optionally substituted 5 or 6membered aromatic heterocycle, or an N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.
 15. A method according toclaim 1 comprising administering to the subject a compound selected fromthe group consisting of a compound of formula (I-A) or (I-B), atautomeric form, stereochemically isomeric form and isotopic formthereof, or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or solvate thereof.
 16. Amethod according to claim 1 for treating a subject suffering from acarcinoma of the bladder, breast, colon, kidney, epidermis, liver, lung,oesophagus, head and neck, gall bladder, ovary, pancreas, stomach,cervix, endometrium, thyroid, prostate, or skin; gastrointestinalcancer; multiple myeloma; thyroid follicular cancer; melanoma; seminoma;teratocarcinoma; osteosarcoma; xeroderma pigmentosum; keratoctanthoma;Kaposi's sarcoma; colorectal cancer; or oral squamous cell carcinoma.17. A method according to claim 1, wherein the disease state orcondition is mediated by a FGFR kinase.
 18. A method according to claim17, wherein the disease state or condition is selected from multiplemyeloma, myeloproliferative disorders, endometrial cancer, prostatecancer, bladder cancer, lung cancer, ovarian cancer, breast cancer,gastric cancer, colorectal cancer, and oral squamous cell carcinoma. 19.A method according to claim 17, wherein the disease state or conditionis selected from lung cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, liver cancer,kidney cancer, breast cancer, colon cancer, colorectal cancer, andprostate cancer.
 20. A method according to claim 1, wherein the diseasestate or condition is carcinoma selected from a carcinoma of thebladder, breast, colon, kidney, epidermis, liver, lung, oesophagus, headand neck, gall bladder, ovary, pancreas, stomach, cervix, endometrium,thyroid, prostate, or skin; gastrointestinal cancer; a hematopoietictumour of lymphoid lineage; a hematopoietic tumour of myeloid lineage;multiple myeloma; thyroid follicular cancer; a tumour of mesenchymalorigin; a tumour of the central or peripheral nervous system; melanoma;seminoma; teratocarcinoma; osteosarcoma; xeroderma pigmentosum;keratoctanthoma; or Kaposi's sarcoma.
 21. A method of inhibiting a FGFRkinase, which method comprises contacting the kinase with akinase-inhibiting compound selected from the group consisting of acompound of formula (I-A) or (I-B)

a tautomeric form, stereochemically isomeric form, and isotopic formthereof, wherein X¹ is N and X² is CR^(3a), or X² is N and X¹ isCR^(3a); each R² is independently selected from hydroxyl, halogen,cyano, C₁₋₄alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl, C₂₋₄alkynyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy,hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkoxy, haloC₁₋₄alkyl, haloC₁₋₄alkoxy,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxy, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl,haloC₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl wherein each C₁₋₄alkyl mayoptionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl, R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with R¹³,C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with R¹³,C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with —C(═O)—R¹³, —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkylsubstituted with —NR⁷R⁸, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸,C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with —NR⁷R⁸, C₁₋₄alkoxy substituted with—C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸, —NR⁷R⁸ and —C(═O)—NR⁷R⁸; or when two R² groups areattached to adjacent carbon atoms they may be taken together to form aradical of formula: —O—(C(R¹⁷)₂)_(p)—O—; —X—CH═CH—; or —X—CH═N—; whereinR¹⁷ represents hydrogen or fluorine, p represents 1 or 2 and Xrepresents O or S; Y represents —CR¹⁸═N—OR¹⁹ or -E-D; D represents a 3to 12 ring membered monocyclic or bicyclic carbocyclyl or a 3 to 12 ringmembered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl containing at least oneheteroatom selected from N, O and S, wherein said carbocyclyl andheterocyclyl may each be optionally substituted by one or more (e.g. 1,2 or 3) R¹ groups; E represents a bond, —(CR²²R²³)_(n)—, C₂₋₄alkenediyloptionally substituted with R²², C₂₋₄alkynediyl optionally substitutedwith R²², —CO—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—, —(CR²²R²³)_(s)—CO—, —NR²²—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—,—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—NR²²—, —O—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—, —(CR²²R²³)_(s)—O—,—S(O)_(m)—(CR²²R²³)_(s), —(CR²²R²³)_(s)—S(O)_(m)—,—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—CO—NR²²—(CR²²R²³)_(s)— or—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—NR²²—CO—(CR²²R²³)_(s)—; R¹ represents hydrogen, halo,cyano, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₄alkenyl,hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl,C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substitutedwith one or two hydroxyl groups, —NR⁴R⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR⁴R⁵, —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵,—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl-NR⁴R⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR⁴R⁵,—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆ alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR¹²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, —C(═O)—R⁶,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—R⁶, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl substituted withR⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—P(═O)(OH)₂ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂; R^(3a)represents hydrogen, chlorine, hydroxyl, or C₁₋₆alkoxy; R³ representshydroxyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkoxy substituted with—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl, C₂₋₆alkynyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl optionallysubstituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl optionallysubstituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₂₋₆alkenyl,hydroxyC₂₋₆alkynyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-O—C(═O)—, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted withC₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl-C(═O)—, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl mayoptionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups or with—O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted with C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₂₋₆alkynylsubstituted with C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁹ andoptionally substituted with —O—C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —C(═O)—R⁹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with hydroxyl and R⁹, C₂₋₆alkenylsubstituted with R⁹, C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with R⁹, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₂₋₆alkenyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹,C₂₋₆alkynyl substituted with —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted withhydroxyl and —NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with one or two halogensand —NR¹⁰R¹¹, —C₁₋₆alkyl-C(R¹²)═N—O—R¹², C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —O—C(═O)—NR¹⁰R¹¹,—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹²—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR²—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, R¹³, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OH)₂ orC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —P(═O)(OC₁₋₆alkyl)₂; R⁴ and R⁵ eachindependently represent hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NR⁴R¹⁵ hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein each C₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substitutedwith one or two hydroxyl groups, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl,—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,—C(═O)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, —C(═O)—R³, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,R¹³ or C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R¹³; R⁶ represents C₃₋₈cycloalkyl,C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, phenyl, 4 to 7-membered monocyclic heterocyclylcontaining at least one heteroatom selected from N, O and S; saidC₃₋₈cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, phenyl, 4 to 7-membered monocyclicheterocyclyl, optionally and each independently being substituted by 1,2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents, each substituent independently being selectedfrom cyano, C₁₋₆alkyl, cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyl, carboxyl,hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, halogen, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl-O—C(═O)—, —NR¹⁴R¹⁵,—C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl,—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl and C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵; R⁷ and R⁸ each independently represent hydrogen,C₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl orC₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl; R⁹ represents C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl,phenyl, naphthyl, or 3 to 12 membered monocyclic or bicyclicheterocyclyl containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O andS, said C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, C₃₋₈cycloalkenyl, phenyl, naphthyl, or 3 to 12membered monocyclic or bicyclic heterocyclyl each optionally and eachindependently being substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 substituents, eachsubstituent independently being selected from ═O, C₁₋₄alkyl, hydroxyl,carboxyl, hydroxyC₁₋₄alkyl, cyano, cyanoC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkyl-O—C(═O)—,C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with C₁₋₄alkyl-O—C(═O)—, C₁₋₄alkyl-C(═O)—,C₁₋₄alkoxyC₁₋₄alkyl wherein each C₁₋₄alkyl may optionally be substitutedwith one or two hydroxyl groups, halogen, haloC₁₋₄alkyl,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₄alkyl, —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkyl substitutedwith —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkoxy,—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₄alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₄alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkylsubstituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with—NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₄alkyl, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,R¹³, —C(═O)—R¹³, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with R¹³, phenyl optionallysubstituted with R¹⁶, phenylC₁₋₆alkyl wherein the phenyl is optionallysubstituted with R¹⁶, a 5 or 6-membered aromatic monocyclic heterocyclylcontaining at least one heteroatom selected from N, O and S wherein saidheterocyclyl is optionally substituted with R¹⁶; or when two of thesubstituents of R⁹ are attached to the same atom, they may be takentogether to form a 4 to 7-membered saturated monocyclic heterocyclylcontaining at least one heteroatom selected from N, O and S; R¹⁰ and R¹¹each independently represent hydrogen, carboxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl,cyanoC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —C(═O)—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl,hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkoxy, C₁₋₆alkoxyC₁₋₆alkyl wherein eachC₁₋₆alkyl may optionally be substituted with one or two hydroxyl groups,R⁶, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with R⁶, —C(═O)—R⁶, —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl,—C(═O)-hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl, —C(═O)-haloC₁₋₆alkyl,—C(═O)-hydroxyhaloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —Si(CH₃)₃,—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵, C₁₋₆alkylsubstituted with —S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵,C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—C₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —NH—S(═O)₂-haloC₁₋₆alkyl, C₁₋₆alkyl substituted with carboxyl, orC₁₋₆alkyl substituted with —NH—S(═O)₂—NR¹⁴R¹⁵; R¹² represents hydrogenor C₁₋₄alkyl optionally substituted with C₁₋₄alkoxy; R¹³ representsC₃₋₈cycloalkyl or a saturated 4 to 6-membered monocyclic heterocyclylcontaining at least one heteroatom selected from N, O and S, whereinsaid C₃₋₈cycloalkyl or monocyclic heterocyclyl is optionally substitutedwith 1, 2 or 3 substituents each independently selected from halogen,hydroxyl, C₁₋₆alkyl, haloC₁₋₆alkyl, ═O, cyano, —C(═O)—C₁₋₆alkyl,C₁₋₆alkoxy, and —NR¹⁴R¹⁵; R¹⁴ and R¹⁵ each independently representhydrogen, or haloC₁₋₄alkyl, or C₁₋₄alkyl optionally substituted with asubstituent selected from hydroxyl, C₁₋₄alkoxy, amino and mono- ordi(C₁₋₄alkyl)amino; R¹⁶ represents hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, C₁₋₄alkyl,C₁₋₄alkoxy, —NR¹⁴R¹⁵ or —C(═O)NR¹⁴R¹⁵; R¹⁸ represents hydrogen, C₁₋₆alkyl, C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl, C₁₋₄alkyl substituted with C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl; R¹⁹represents hydrogen; C₁₋₆ alkyl; C₃₋₈ cycloalkyl; C₁₋₆alkyl substitutedwith —O—R²⁰; —(CH₂)_(r)—CN; —(CH₂)_(r)—CONR²⁰R²¹; —(CH₂)_(r1)—NR²⁰R²¹;—(CH₂)_(r1)—NR²⁰COR²¹; —(CH₂)_(r1)—NR²⁰—(CH₂)_(s)—SO₂—R²¹;—(CH₂)_(r1)—NH—SO₂—NR²⁰R²¹; —(CH₂)_(r1)—NR²⁰CO₂R²¹;—(CH₂)_(r)—SO₂NR²⁰R²¹; phenyl optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3, 4 or5 substituents each independently selected from halogen, C₁₋₄alkyl,C₁₋₄alkyloxy, cyano and amino; a 5- or 6-membered aromatic monocyclicheterocycle containing at least one heteroatom selected from N, O and S,said heterocycle being optionally substituted with 1, 2, 3 or 4substituents each independently selected from halogen, C₁₋₄alkyl,C₁₋₄alkyloxy, cyano and amino; wherein said C₁₋₆ alkyl and C₃₋₈cycloalkyl, may be optionally substituted by one or more R²⁰ groups R²⁰and R²¹ independently represent hydrogen, C₁₋₆ alkyl, hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl,—(CH₂)_(n)—O—C₁₋₆alkyl, or when attached to a nitrogen atom R²⁰ and R²¹can be taken together to form with the nitrogen atom to which they areattached a monocyclic saturated 4, 5 or 6-membered ring which optionallycontains a further heteroatom selected from O, S and N; R²² and R²³independently represent hydrogen, C₁₋₆ alkyl, or hydroxyC₁₋₆alkyl; mindependently represents an integer equal to 0, 1 or 2; n independentlyrepresents an integer equal to 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; s independentlyrepresents an integer equal to 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4; r independentlyrepresent an integer equal to 1, 2, 3, or 4; r1 independently representan integer equal to 2, 3 or 4; or an N-oxide thereof, a pharmaceuticallyacceptable salt thereof or a solvate thereof.